Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2004-R0089 - Contract For Land Application Site Shop - Minnix Commercial, Inc. - 02_19_2004Resolution No. 2004-R0089 February 19, 2004 Item No. 48 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract for the Land Application Site Shop/Office at Wilson, Texas, by and between the City of Lubbock and Minnix Commercial, Inc. of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 19th day o ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: — v vl-� 1A &1-11�5 �� Victor Kilman, turchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Attorney gs/ccdocs/res-Contract-Minnix Commercial.res February 6, 2004 No Text ITB #257-03/RS, Addendum #3 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 7 1625 13TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #3 ITB #257-03 / RS Land Application Site Shop/Office at Wilson, Texas MAILED TO VENDOR: January 23, 2004 CLOSE DATE: January 27, 2004 @ 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Addendum #3 issued by Adling Associates. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806) 775-2164 or Email to rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, 4CI 01 LUB C Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's resaonsibility to advise the Citv of Lubbock Purchasing Manager if anv laneuaee. reauirements, etc., or anv combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the reauirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. 257-03RSAdd3 No Text ADDENDUM NUMBER THREE PAGE 1 January 23, 2004 LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS ITB #257-03/RS City of Lubbock Lubbock, Texas Adling Associates AA Project Number 617 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS: #107T I 0 /' ZL.C4 The following shall be incorporated into and become a part of the original Drawings and Specifications of the above identified project. You must acknowledge receipt of this Addendum by noting it on your Proposal form. DRAWINGS: ITEM # 1: SHEET S 1 Delete the reference to the "VAPOR BARRIER" on Section 14/S 1 — a vapor barrier will not be provided ITEM #2: SHEET S 1, Detail 24/S 1 Provide a #5 bar at the HAIR -PIN typical. ITEM #3: SHEET AS1.0 - SEPTIC TANK The septic tank and the lines to the building shall be provided by Owner. Contractor shall tie-in at approximately the building line or within 5'-0" ITEM #4: SHEET Al. 1—ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Concrete floors shall be sealed as specified; delete references to stain concrete. END OF ADDENDUM #3 ITB #257-03/RS, Addendum #2 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #2 ITB #257-03 / RS Land Application Site Shop/Office at Wilson, Texas MAILED TO VENDOR: January 20, 2004 CLOSE DATE: January 27, 2004 @ 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The Time For Completion for this project has been extended from 60 (sixty) consecutive calendar days to 90 (ninety) consecutive calendar days. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806) 775-2164 or Email to rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, ARonShu UBBOCK ield Senior Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager if any laneuage, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. __. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. 257-03RSAdd2 No Text ITB #257-03/RS, Addendum #1 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13TM STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 _ http://purchasing.ci.Lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #1 ITB #257-03 / RS Land Application Site Shop/Office at Wilson, Texas MAILED TO VENDOR: January 20, 2004 CLOSE DATE: January 27, 2004 @ 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). _r Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Addendum #1 issued by Adling Associates. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806) 775-2164 or Email to rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUB K Ron Shuf field Senior Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. 257-03RSAdd 1 ADDENDUM NUMBER ONE PAGE 1 January 19, 2004 LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS ITB #257-03/RS City of Lubbock Lubbock, Texas Adling Associates AA Project Number 617 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS: The following shall be incorporated into and become a part of the original Drawings and Specifications of the above identified project. You must acknowledge receipt of this Addendum by noting it on your Proposal form. SPECIFICATIONS: ITEM #1: SECTION 08.700, FINISH HARDWARE, heading 1.13, KEYING, subparagraph `A': revise to read; All locksets shall be keyed as directed by the owner. DRAWINGS: ITEM 92: SHEET AS 1.0 FINISH GRADE: The finish grade condition of the completed site shall remain approximately at the existing grade condition. The fmished slab shall be 8 inches minimum above finished grade. ITEM #3: SHEET A2.0, Wall Sections 2/A2.0, 3/A2.0 and 4/A2.0 — Change the note "6" METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C. " to read 8" METAL SUDS 18ga. AT 16" O.C. at the 112'-0" CEILING. SEE ATTACHED DRAWING. - -, ITEM #4: SHEET A2.0, Wall Sections 2/A2.0, 3/A2.0 and 4/A2.0 —delete the "'/a" PLYWOOD" decking at the 112'-0" CEILING. SEE ATTACHED DRAWING. END OF ADDENDUM # 1 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS ITB #257-03/RS "A City Of Planned Progress" CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas � � � CITY OF LUBBOCK \} INVITATION TO BID [j FOR � TITLE LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WLSON,TEXAS ADDRESS LUBBOCK TES � � � . � . . 7B NUMBER 25- +RS � PROJECT NUMBER: 6415.8704 . c> \; CONTRACT PREPARED BY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT � . . � � (� � 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIFICATIONS NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITS #257-03/RS y Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 o'clock p.m, on the 271h day of January, 2004, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 3:00 o'clock p.m. on the 27th day of January, 2004, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 12th day of February, 2004, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on 14th day of January, 2003 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Engineering Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13" Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Adling Associates, 2529 74th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, Phone: (806) 748-0880. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock ADA Coordinator at (806) 775-2018 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER 1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2 3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID DELIVERY TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 3:00 p.m. CST, the 27th day of Janua , 2004 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #257-03/RS, LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre -bid meeting will be held at 10:00 a.m., January 14th, 2003 in Engineering Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. i 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. LICENSES PERMITS TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any -" employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 2 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion conceming this bid. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasina Manaaer if anv lanauaae, requirements, etc., or anv combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 13t' Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: RShuffield@mylubbock.us 13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within SIXTY (60) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements 3 E._ contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17A The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 23 EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods - as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 24 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 25 INSURANCE j 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether t ` 5 t_ performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. i 28 r4° 30 31 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. PREPARATION FOR BID 29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 29.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 29.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The bidder's bid maybe 7 deemed not to meet specifications or the bid may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. 32 BID AWARD 32.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the total bid amount. 32.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may j result in disqualification of the bid. 32.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 32.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder j would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 32.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal; State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 32.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. r f BID SUBMITTAL I BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT GATE: January 27, 2004 PROJECT NUMBER: #257-03/RS - LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS Bid of MINNIX COMMERCIAL, INC. (hereinafter called Bidder) "o the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) -Gentlemen: j he Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all " ►ther related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding he construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, -within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the vork required under the contract documents. MATERIALOESG ` *09WO Ffr 41 WPM ($ 70i SPQ0• 00 ) iERVICES: S�Vi 7>d /VWEj/i(/D�� �° �Ibt-ri ($ `c�� rl��•oa ) _.TOTAL BIDAf &N reb VhtLTEEP 7V~ 9_--% U ti1D &M PBtff {Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 60 (SIXTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner 9s liquidated damages the sum of $250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time et forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract -documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with --instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. -Y Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the )idding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the -Mans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to ;ommence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on -�✓hich he has bid; -as provided in the contract documents. No Text a Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or �.ertified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the -bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all ecessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. _ Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Five Percent (5% Dollars $ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, 1nsurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of eceipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract -documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM _I. PRIOR TO BID OPENING. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) %TTEST: 1 ,i r , Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: 4ddenda No. 1 Date 1 /i�004 4ddenda No. Date 1 i n i Addenda No. Date 1' 233 2��4 4ddenda No. Date Date: January 27, 2004 ///Ci orized Signature (/ Jerry Smith (Printed or Typed Name) Minnix Commercial, Inc. Company 14302 S. Slide Address Road Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas State �7p9424 C7335 Telephone: 806 _ 798 Fax:806 - 798-9761 " -MMBE Firm: Woman Black American Native American Hispanic American Asian Pacific American Other (Specify) 2 .......... (. ,, t �. _' f A LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS i Minority Owned Yes No J 1. ❑ ❑ 1 -73. ❑ ❑ 4. ❑ ❑ :5. ❑ ❑ _-i 6. ❑ ❑ 7. ❑ ❑ 8. ❑ ❑ -9. ❑ ❑ 10. ❑ ❑ 0 , t _.i _.., 3 No Text CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder I) And Attached to Bid Submittal __I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. M' _ Jerry Smith `Contr o ignature Contractor (Print) _;CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Minnix Commercial, Inc. (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 14302 S. Slide Rd, Lubbock, TX 794 Name of Agent/Broker: David Tate, David Tate Insurance Address of Agent/Broker: 5233 79th Street ,City/State/Zip: Lubbock, Texas 79424 - Agent/BrokerTelephone Number: ( 806 ) 794-1177 'Date: January 27, 2004 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and -award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, i�please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. :BID #257-03/RS - LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS 4 No Text THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AlA Document A310 Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN ¢Y THESE PRESENTS, thetwe Mluanix Commercial 14302 S. Slide Road Lubbock. TX 79424 as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 2100 Fleur Drive — Des Moines,1A 50321 a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are hold and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock 1625 13'h Street Lubbock, TX 79401 as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID Dollars ($ 5 "A G.A.R. ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, Jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, The Principal has submitted a bid for Land Application Site Shop/Office at Wilson, TX NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall acoept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in sccordanca with the terms of such bid, and give ouch bond or bonds as may be speed In the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performanoo of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or In the event of the fallure of the Pdn*&I to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Prinolpal shall pay to the OblWft ,the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified In said bid and such larger amount for which the Obliges may in good faith wAtrWd with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, than this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in Wit force and effed. Signed d sealed thi 27th day of January 2004. Minnix Commercial un�s) �ercc--haut—sBonding Company (Mutual) �FYcrneva) r Larry T. h ,+s) •fn-PaGL ALN DOCUMENT A910 , WD BOND. A1A V . FEBRUARY 1970 Ed . THE AMRICAMN8TITUTE OF ARCHMIC75, 1736 MY, AVE,, N.W.. WASHINGTON, OZ. 20005 1 ��.., �l �.. � �. cv rcnants t5onaing Rom any (MUTUAL)41 _ POWER OF ATTORNEY Know All Persona By These Presents, that the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), a corporation duly organised under the laws of the State of Iowa, and having its principal office in the Cry of Des Moines, County of Polk, State Of Iowa, hath made. constituted and appoiinted�-and does by these presents -make, constitute and appoint Larry Trt m m Smith at . Lubbock and State of Texas its true and lawful Atlorney-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name. place and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in its behalf as surety any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances or other wntten obligations in the nature thereof, sublect to the limitation that any such instrument shall not exceed the amount of: THREE MILLION ($3,000,000.00) DOLLARS and to bind the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officers of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), and all such acts Of &31d Anomey-in-Fact, pursuant to the authority herein given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power-of-Attomey is made and executed pursuant to and by authanty of the following Amended Substituted and Restated By -Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) on October 3, 1992. ARTICLE 11, SECTION S. — The Chairman of the Board or President or any Vice President or Secretary shall have power and author- ity to appoint Attomeys-in-Fact. and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seat of the Company and undertakings recogruzances, convects of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. ARTICLE 11, SECTION 9. — The signature of arty authorized officer end the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or Certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, underrating• recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company, and such signature and seal when so used shall nave the same force and off ad as though manually fated. in Witness Whereof. MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAy has caused there presents to be signed by its President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed, this Znd day of June , Z000. STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POLY. as. ■..•... •• Q C •e• moo; oaPop �y; 1933 . mod. Vic. '•.•.••• MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) By /-.v7f � PrOSIANd On this 2nd day of June 2000 , before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me pereonally known, who being by me duty swam did say that he Is President of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), the corporation described in the foregoing InstrumetiL and that Ina Sea! affixed to the said inablrment is the Corporate Sea( of tfte said Corporaton and that the said Instrument was signed and seeded In behalf! of said Corporation by authority of its Board of Directors. In Testimony Whereof. I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal Ill the City of Des Moines, Iowa, the day and year first ■hrwe wrinon_ Nof>try Patift Polk County{ Iowa STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POL.K sal I. WWlam Warner. Jr., Secretary of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL.), do hereby candy that the above and foregoing _ is awe and correct copy of the POWER -OF -ATTORNEY, executed by said MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), which is 9011 _ rn lance and eAeet--_. In tallness whereof. l have reunto out my hared and eff►.ed the Steal of the Comp" on this O? 7 day of••/L.) 4/ G% ' ®200 �' • • • � / l �r -/ �Q��Ge CO S .• !/,le. , a:.-t/ ■ age o �P'Qt� " +� • S•cnf•rr Mac 0414 lZmal ; �'� 1933 ez ._ ��. , v. ...- �._ .. i F" PAYMENT BOND THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A312 Bond No.: TX 599995 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): Minnix Commercial, Inc. 14302 S. Slide Road Lubbock, TX 79424 OWNER (Name and Address): City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: 19th Fehrnary 2(1(14 Amount: $R8,748.f�4 ) Description (Name an ocation : SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 2100 Fleur Drive Des Moines, IA 50321 Land Application Site Shop/Office BOND At Wilson, TX Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): 19th February 2004 Amount: $118.748.00 Modifications to this Bond: ❑ None ❑ See Page 6 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) nix Commercial, Inc. Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) Signature: Signature: A"'t Name and e. ���� 'X K - n►, v o"e �•��- < <,!c av Name and Title: Don E. Smith, Attorney -in -Fact (Any additional signatures appear on page 6) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY -Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or Smith Construction Bonding other party): Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer --` 3116 Kellway Drive —Suite 110 City of Lubbock — Office of Purchasing Carrollton, TX 7Suit Lubbock, Tx 79457 Tele: 972-732-8175 Tele: 806-775-2170 AIA DOCUMENT A312 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA ® A3 12-1984 4 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the perfor- mance of the Construction Contract, which is incorpo- rated herein by reference. 2 With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity whose claim, demand, lien or suit is for the payment for labor, materials or equipment fur- nished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligtion shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes pay- ment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: .1 Have furnished written notice to the Con- tractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and .2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above no- tice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and .3 Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous - written notice furnished to the Contractor. 5 If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is suffi- cient compliance. 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. 6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the perfor- mance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's prior- ity to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelat- ed to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claim- ant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obli- gations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent juris- diction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last mate- rials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Con- struction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the adress shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this AIA DOCUMENT A312 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND . DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA ® A312-1984 5 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987 "2 Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a ' common law bond. 14 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 15 DEFINITIONS 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct _.� contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equip- ment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limita- tion in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, i telephone service or rental equipment used in the 1W MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for addtional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name an Address: Signature: Name an Address: AIA DOCUMENT A312 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND - . DECEMBER 1984 ED. •AIA ® A312-1984 6 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987 POWER OF ATTORNEY 'Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) Nations Bonding Company Bond No. TX 599995 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY !HESE PRESENTS: That MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, And that NATIONS BONDING COMPANY Is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas (herein collectively railed the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Don E. Smith of Carrollton and State of Texas their true and lawful Attorney -in -Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred In their name, place and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in their behalf as surety any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances or other written obligations In the nature thereof, subject to the limitation that any such instrument shall ndt exceed the amount of: SIX MILLION ($6,000,000.00) DOLLARS and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as If such bond or undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies, and �11 the acts of said Attomey-in-Fact, pursuant to the authority herein given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power-of-Attomey is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaws adopted by the Board of Directors of Merchants Bonding bompany (Mutual) on November 16, 2002 and adopted by the Board of Directors of Nations Bonding Company on April 19, 2603, "The Chairman of the Board or President or any Vice President or Secretary shall have power and authority to appoint Attorneys -in -Fact., and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and otherwritings obligatory in the nature thereof, The signature of pny authorized officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or Certification therhof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually fixed." In Witness. Whereof, the Companles have caused this instrument to be signed and sealed this 1st day of May, 2003. •D', j 0.• UD.�PG�9 C).. Z: V -o- d;:Q: 2003 as STATE OF IOWA ° • "'� COUNTY OF POLK ss. MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) NATIONS BONDING COMPANY By 7 ;/� President On this 1st day of May, 2003, before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me personally known, who being by me duty swom did say that he Is President of MER6HANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) and NATIONS BONDING COMPANY; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing ihstrument are the corporate seals of the Companies; and that the said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of the Companie� by authority of their respective Boards of Directors. In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Des Moines, Iowa, the day and year first above written. MARILYN 80Y Commission ion Number1O012 My Commisslon Expires November 4, 20044 Notary Public, Polk County, Iowa STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POLK ss. I, Agltlam Warner, Jr., Secretary of MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) and NATIONS BONDING COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and toredoing Is a true and correct copy of the POWER -OF -ATTORNEY executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect and has not been amended or revoked. In Witness Vdhereef, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed theseal'of the Companies on this 24thday of Flatruary 2W4 Secretary NBC 0103 (4/03) No Text No Text m } J¢ i PERFORMANCE BOND r THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A312 Bond No.: TX 599995 Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Minnix Commercial, Inc. Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 14302 S. Slide Road 2100 Fleur Drive Lubbock, TX 79424 Des Moines, IA 50321 OWNER (Name and Address): City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT - Date: 191h February 2004 Amount: $118,748.00 Land Application Site Sbop/Office Description (Name and Location): At Wilson, TX BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): 19th February 2004 Amount: $118,748.00 Modifications to this Bond: Q None ❑ See Page 3 -- CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) innix Commercial, Inc. Merchants Bonding Compa (Mutual) Signature: Signature: (� Name an tl : Jerry Smith, Vice PresidentName and Title: Don E. Smith, Attorney -in -Fact (Any additional signatures appear on page 3) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY --Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or Smith Construction Bonding other party): Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer 3116 Kellway Drive — Suite 110 City of Lubbock -Office of Purchasing Carrollton, TX 75006 Lubbock, TX 79457 Tele: 972-732-8175 Tele: 806-775-2170 AIA DOCUMENT A312 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • • DECEMBER 1984 ED. •AIA ® A312-1984 1 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -- THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construc- tion Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reason- able time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be de- clared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Sub- paragraph 3.1; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accor- dance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Para- graph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's ex- pense take one of the following actions: 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construc- tion Contract itself, through its agents or through inde- pendent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Con- struction Contract, arrange for a contract to be pre- pared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in ex- cess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is deter- mined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or 2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Sure- ty is obligated without duplication for: 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correc- tion of defective work and completion of the Construc- tion Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and re- sulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual dam- ages caused by delayed performance or non-perfor- mance of the Contractor. 7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Con- struction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, includ- ing changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obliga- tions. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever oc- curs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation avail- AIA DOCUMENT A312 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA ® A312-1984 2 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987 able to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the sig- nature page. 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this ' Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Con - MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: tractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, re- duced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Con- tract. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to per- form or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for addtional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name an Address: Address: AIA DOCUMENT A312 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA ® A312-1984 3 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D,C, 20006 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ACORD,n CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE 03/O1/2004 PRODUCER DAVID TATE INSURANCE AGENCY THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 5233 79TH ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE LUBBOCK TX 79424— INSURED INSURERA:MID CONTINENT INSURER B: TEXAS MUTUAL MINNIX COMMERCIAL INC. INSURER c: GREAT AMERICAN 14302 S SLIDE INSURERD: BOX 64895 INSURERE: LUBBOCK TX 79464— 1't1VFRA(:9=C THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MM/DD/YY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MM/DD/YY LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY 04GL527599 07/07/2003 07/07/2004 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 100,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE FKOCCUR / / / / MED EXP (Any one person) $ 0 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY JECT LOC A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 06tx2901379 07/07/2003 07/07/2004 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT ANY AUTO (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY ALL OWNED AUTOS / / / / SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY X HIRED AUTOS / / / / X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) $ PROPERTYDAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ANY AUTO / / / / $ AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESS LIABILITY / / / / EACH OCCURRENCE $ OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ $ DEDUCTIBLE / / / / $ RETENTION $ s^, B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 1095348 01/01/2004 01/01/2005 OMI RYUTs O R E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE$ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000 OTHER C MONTHLY REPORT TIM6017290 07/07/2003 07/07/2004 BUILDERS RISK I DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1 additional insured on the commercial general liability/hired/non owned auto and waiver of subrogation on the commercial general liability, hired/non owned auto and the workers compensation k I CERTIFICATE HOLDER I I ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: _ CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT CITY OF LUBBOCK FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE BOX 2000 INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. PURCHASING DEPT: BRANDY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE IJ® LUBBOCK TX 79457— ACORD 25-S (7/97) © ACORD CORPORATION 1988 INS025S (sslo).ol ELECTRONIC LASER FORMS, INC. - (800)327-0545 Page 1 of 2 a I� REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: i a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and () 9 �P P 9 9 P J (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten)10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.❑ I CONTRACT I CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 19th day of February, 2004 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Minnix Commercial, Inc. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. W ITNESSETH: That for and inconsideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #257-03/RS - LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE AT WILSON, TEXAS - $118,748.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day fit above written. CITY Q&U�9C0EXAS (OWNER): By: ATTEST: City S retary AP . OVED T ONTENT: —71ML � 2e'/JJ'/ wner's Repres ntati APPROVED AS TO FORM: (� City Aftorney CONTRACTOR: M PL I've . Z IN I Z NAME:, E'XRV St71M4 TITLE: �%tCE - ?885I b ir-t.11 COMPLETE ADDRESS: Minnix Commercial, Inc. 14302 S. Slide Rd Lubbock,Texas 79424 ATTEST: r Corpor Secretary GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit MINNIX COMMERCIAL, INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative HARLAN STAUFFER FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall -, accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The - Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) 2 k- calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. E 1_, 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timelywritten objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT 20 21. The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has L' previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests -° will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance t with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in I , the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written I-' notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial 1 j action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK a ' The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or ( Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the I extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be I kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." 25 No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, r s are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. A. General Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $500,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, §0 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; .- Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, I� E F to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. Umbrella Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor' in Section 11406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. I [- , I 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the j 4 duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new (, certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the I governmental entity: 8 �.e� .11 (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will G provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the g_ duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the r- insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; 10 �. I (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or otherservice related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; r 11 (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. w� 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in anyway, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material L or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and l a save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material IL _3 or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the f contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the j Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. f 1 7{ t L_ 12 1 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as -, the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as (-3 provided by the contract documents. ^; 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this 13 contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the r construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. I The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall -show the order in which the Contractor intends to cant' on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under t this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without } limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, 14 6 against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the i contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's T agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the l- Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been _j substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 15 t._. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 16 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, I or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the ._. Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and 17 his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual f written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived-3 from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be j liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. . INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to (. direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's { work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. I 18 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus (- materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 19 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS r Craft RE: RESOLUTION NO.2002-R0483, NOVEMBER 14, 2002 Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker -- Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger r Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Journey Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Apprentice Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Hourly Rate 11.50 12.00 7.50 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.06 7.00 9.00 11.00 15.00 8.00 10.00 9.00 18.00 10.00 9.50 10.50 10.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 1 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 7.50 Concrete Finisher 9.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.50 Electrical Repairer -Equipment 12.50 Flagger 6.50 Form Setter 8.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.50 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 9.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 9.00 Bulldozer 9.00 Concrete Paving Machine 9.00 Front End Loader 9.00 Heavy Equipment Operator 9.00 Light Equipment Operator 8.00 Motor Grader Operator 10.25 Roller 7.00 Scraper 7.50 Tractor -Trailer 8.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 8.00 Truck Driver -Light 7.00 2 a EX MIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. .4._1 I 7 Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. 3 SPECIFICATIONS Contract #168-03 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 LAND APPLICATION SITE SHOP/OFFICE — WILSON SITE City of Lubbock Lubbock, Texas Adling Associates Project Number 617/03 November 12, 2003 TABLE OF CONTENTS Following is the enumeration of the Specifications, Drawings and Addenda which form a part of this Contract as set forth in the General Conditions of the Agreement. Table of Contents ...... SPECIFICATIONS BOUND HEREIN Pages ............................................................................................................................................................... 4 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK Section 02.110 Site Demolition and Clearing......................................................................................................................3 02.210 Site Grading...................................................................................................................................................2 02.300 Earthwork.......................................................................................................................................................9 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03.301 Cast -in -Place Concrete......................................................................................................... DIVISION 4 MASONRY (Not in this Contract) DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05.500 Metal Fabrications ............................... DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY AND WOODWORK Section 06.100 Carpentry Work ...................................................... ..........5 ...................... 3 ........................................................................... 4 Contract #168-03 TABLE OF CONTENTS R Page 2 DMSION 7 MOISTURE AND THERMAL PROTECTION Section07.180 Concrete Sealer...............................................................................................................................................3 07.210 Building Insulation........................................................................................................................................2 07.900 Caulking and Sealants..................................................................................................................................5 DMSION 8 DOORS WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.............................................................................................................. 4 08.331 Overhead Doors..............................................................................................................................................3 08.520 Aluminum Windows....................................................................................................................................3 08.700 Finish Hardware............................................................................................................................................6 08.800 Glass and Glazing ..........................................................................................................................................3 DMSION 9 FINISHES Section 09.260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems.......................................................................................................................5 09.510 Acoustical Ceilings....................................................................................................................................... 4 09.900 Painting............................................................................................................................................................6 09.970 FRP Wall Panels............................................................................................................................................2 DMSION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10.800 Toilet Accessories..........................................................................................................................................2 DMSION 11 EQUIPMENT (Not in this Contract) DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (Not in this Contract) DMSION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section I3.122 Metal Building Systems..............................................................................................................................10 DMSION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not in this Contract) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15010 15050 15060 15081 15083 15110 15140 Basic Mechanical Requirements................................................................................................................5 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods...............................................................................................6 Hangersand Supports..................................................................................................................................6 DuctInsulation...............................................................................................................................................5 PipeInsulation................................................................................................................................................7 Valves................................................................................................................................................................5 DomesticWater Piping................................................................................................................................6 1_ Contract #168-03 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping................................................................................................................6 15194 Fuel Gas Piping...............................................................................................................................................6 15410 Plumbing Fixtures.........................................................................................................................................8 15430 Plumbing Specialties.....................................................................................................................................6 15485 Electric Water Heaters................................................................................................................................ 4 15530 Furnaces...................................................................................................................................................5 15542 Fuel -Fired Radiant Heaters........................................................................................................................ 4 15550 Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks.............................................................................................................3 15738 Split -System Air -Conditioning Units...................................................................................................... 4 15815 Metal Ducts...................................................................................................................................................7 15820 Duct Accessories...........................................................................................................................................4 15838 Power Ventilators..........................................................................................................................................5 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles.................................................................................................................3 DMSION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements................................................................................................................... 4 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods...................................................................................................7 16140 Wiring Devices.............................................................................................................................................. 4 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers..................................................................................................3 16442 Panelboards.....................................................................................................................................................5 16491 Fuses.................................................................................................................................................................3 16511 Interior Lighting.............................................................................................................................................6 DRAWINGS BOUND SEPARATELY Cover Sheet G1.0 Abbreviations and Legends Structural Sl Foundation Plan &t Details Architectural AS1.0 Site Plan and Details A1.0 Floor Plan &r Elevations Au Schedules, Door Details, Enlarged Plans &t Interior Elevations An Wall Sections &r Details A3.0 Reflected Ceiling Plan &t Roof Plan Mechanical MI Mechanical Plan &t Details Plumbing PI Plumbing Plan &r Details Electrical El Electrical Plans &t Details I Contract ##168-03 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 k� ADDENDA AS ISSUED 11 Number: Date: Number: Date: Number: Date: Number: Date: End of Table of Contents �i r-I Contract #168-03 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING Section 02.110 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of site demolition and clearing is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All above and below grade obstructions conflicting with new construction shall be removed under this heading. Site clearing operations required in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Removal of vegetation and topsoil. 2. Removal of surplus materials. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features to remain. Any damage caused by the Contractor shall be repaired immediately at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Does not Apply) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. Demolition includes the complete wrecking of structures and the removal and disposal of demolished materials, as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. B. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of structures and items to be demolished. C. The use of explosives will not be permitted. µ D. Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. E. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from w authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. F. Ensure the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities and persons. G. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no cost to the Owner. H. Maintain existing utilities, indicated to remain, keep in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. Contract #168-03 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING Section 02.110 Page 2 I. Demolish existing structures completely and remove from the site. Use such methods as required to complete the work within the limitations of governing regulations. J. Break up and remove concrete slabs -on -grade, walks, roots, debris, rubbish, and all other items found on the site. Remove all existing below grade foundations and other obstructions not scheduled to remain. K. Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from the demolition of structures as required under Section 02.200 "Earthwork". L. After fill placement and compaction, grade the surface to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures. M. Remove from the site debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations. N. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on the site. 3.02 SITE CLEARING A. Remove all other items not designated to remain such as shrubs, grass, weeds, other vegetation or obstructions that interfere with the installation of new construction. Also, remove such items elsewhere on the site or premises as specifically indicated. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered, and in such manner so as to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. C. Topsoil is defined as Amarillo fine sandy loam soil found in a depth of not less than 18". Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 3/4" in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material. D. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil materials, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" loose depth and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. E. All above and below grade obstructions conflicting with new construction shall be removed under this heading. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Report to the Architect all active utilities encountered which are not indicated on the Drawings. Notify the respective utility companies of any damage caused to active utilities and protect active utilities pending instructions for proceeding with the work. B. The Contractor shall repair, at the Contractor's expense, damage to the active utilities to the satisfaction" ' of the respective utility company. ( i 3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning of combustible, cleared and grubbed materials is not permitted on the Owner's property. i Contract #168-03 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING Section 02.110 Page 3 B. Remove all combustible and non-combustible waste materials completely from the Owner's property and dispose of all materials in strict accordance with the authorities having jurisdiction. End of Section ' Contract #168-03 SITE GRADING Section 02.210 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Work of the section includes the providing compacting and finish grading of topsoil within the limits of grading shown on the site plan. B. Provide all materials, equipment and services required to meet the requirements of this section. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features to remain. Any damage caused by the Contractor shall be repaired immediately at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil is defined as Amarillo fine sandy loam soil. B. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 3/4" in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TOPSOIL A. Provide a minimum depth of 6 inches of topsoil over all site areas which are not shown to be paved within the . y limits of grading. 3.02 COMPACTION A. Compact top 6 inches of topsoil at 90 percent maximum dry density. 3.03 GRADING A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading, including adjacent transition areas. B. Provide uniform, compacted grading between new elevations. C. Provide uniform, compacted grading between new elevations and existing grades at the limits of grading. D. Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. 3.04 GRADING TOLERANCE g_', Contract #168-03 SITE GRADING 1 Section 02.210 Page 2 A. Finish areas receiving topsoil shall be graded and compacted to not greater than 0.10 foot above or below the finish grades shown on the Drawings. 3.05 EXCESS MATERIALS A. Remove all excess materials from the site. End of Section ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade pavements. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Subbase course for concrete walks pavements. 4. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. B. Related Sections include the following: - 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below -grade improvements and utilities. 2. Divisions 2, 15, and 16 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. EARTHWORK 02300 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. I. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility -locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. EARTHWORK 02300 - 2 " ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-min) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-nun) sieve. F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. G. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. 2.2 CONTROLLED LOW -STRENGTH MATERIAL A. Controlled Low -Strength Material: Low -density, self -compacting, flowable concrete material as follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 3. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/4-inch (19-1nm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 4. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 5. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Produce low -density, controlled low -strength material with the following physical properties: 1. As -Cast Unit Weight: 30 to 36 lb/cu. ft. (480 to 576 kg,/cu. in) at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138/C 138M. 2. Compressive Strength: 80 psi (550 kPa) , when tested according to ASTM C 495. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork .} operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. EARTHWORK 02300 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 l D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. 3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches (600 min) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. C. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. [4 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. e. Insert dimension beneath pipe in trenches.4 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 nun) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit. EARTHWORK 02300 - 4 ( l ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 min) in nominal diameter and flat- bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 min) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 min) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof -rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Proof -roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. EARTHWORK 02300 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3.9 A. 3.10 A. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. BACKFILL Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 2. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 3. Removing concrete formwork. 4. Removing trash and debris. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 min) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 3 Section " Cast -in -Place Concrete (Limited Applications)." D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 nmi) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 nun) over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. E. Controlled Low -Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low -strength material to a height of 12 inches (300 min) over the utility pipe or conduit. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. 3.11 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. I D1:\wool 02300 - 6 � i -j ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 3. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.12 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.13 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 nun) in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 3. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.14 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. sB. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: L EARTHWORK 02300 - 7 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) 2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge. 3.15 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Place base course material over subbase course under hot -mix asphalt pavement. 2. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 3. Place subbase and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 4. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. B. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.17 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep } free of trash and debris. [ EARTHWORK 02300 - 8 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, pp , q ty, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02300 IEARTHWORK 02300 - 9 ,' i_ ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 03301 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301. B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. C. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design; and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. D. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and protection of in -place concrete. 2. Formwork and form accessories. 3. Steel reinforcement and supports. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 4. Concrete mixtures. 5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 11/4/2003 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1-1/2-inch nominal size. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Water: Potable. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 %&A C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. CONCRETE MIXES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI301, for normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Slump: 4 inches. C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 2.5 to 4.5 percent. 1. Air content of trowel -finished interior concrete floors shall not exceed 3.0 percent. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C 94. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. 3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 3.3 JOINTS A. General: Construct j oints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 3.4 A. B. C. 3.5 11/4/2003 cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Completely remove fins and other projections. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finish, unless otherwise indicated. D. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. E. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 4 " i ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.7 TOLERANCES A. Comply with ACI117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI306.1 for cold -weather protection, and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. C. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by moisture curing, moisture -retaining -cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. .w 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. I Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. Perform tests according to ACI 301. 3.10 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION 03301 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 5 Contract #168-03 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on the Drawings and includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, angles and pipe which are not a part of other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. B. Provide all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for the furnishing and installing of miscellaneous fabricated metal items as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Assume responsibility for accuracy of such dimensions and for proper fitting and assembly of work. B. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Assemble with as few joints as possible. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. All welding shall be done in strict accordance with the American Welding Society's "Code for Welding in Building Construction" (AWS D1.0), latest edition. D. Drill, cut, punch and tap metal items as required for anchoring and accommodating work of other trades. Reinforce where required. Design and fabricate so that items will not be distorted or fasteners overstressed due to expansion and construction. E. The American Institute of Steel Construction's "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" and "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", latest editions, and hereby included by reference, and are a part of the Specifications for this division of work to the same extent as if written out in full and bound herewith, insofar as they are applicable and not in conflict with these Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work. Including paint products. Indicate by transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to Installer. B. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal assemblies. Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show anchorages and accessory items. Contract #168-03 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS ri 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36. C. All galvanizing shall be hot dripped galvanizing, ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; black finish unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise shown or specified. E. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-645. F. Provide all necessary bolts, angles, clips, hangers, screws and other items required for a complete and satisfactory assembly and installation. G. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Sleeve type anchors meeting Federal Specifications FF-S-325, Group II, Type 3, Class 3 or Wedge Type anchors meeting Federal Specifications FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. H. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel, with dimensions complying with RISC specifications. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and Ll durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. t...., B. Form exposed work true to line and level accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. C. Weld comers and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish hardware and similar items. G. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work. H. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill Contract #168-03 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 3 scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning: or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning;, or SSPC SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning." I. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPS SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning." Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. K. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS A. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of other sections of the work. B. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered comers, welded brackets and splice plates and minimum joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in -place construction; including threaded fasteners, toggle bolts, through -bolts, screws and other connectors required or as detailed. B. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. E. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Do not paint stainless steel bolts, nuts or washers. 3.02 CLEANING A. All debris and unused materials resulting from the work of this section shall be removed from the site as the work progresses. End of Section I Contract #168-03 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 1 A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Carpentry work includes carpentry not specified as a part of other sections of these Specifications and which generally is not exposed to view unless otherwise Detailed or Scheduled. Work under this section includes: 1. Wood Forming. 2. Wood Grounds, Nailers and Blocking. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber standards shall comply with PS 20 and with the applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated. B. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that materials have been inspected and graded in accordance with grading standards if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. C. Keep materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surfaces. Protect exposed materials from weather. D. Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports so that attached work will comply with design requirements. E. Shop -fabricate carpentry work to the extent feasible and where shop fabrication will result in better workmanship than feasible for on -site fabrication. F. Treat lumber as specified. G. Fit carpentry work to other work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. H. Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements. I. Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation within stacks. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp or wet surfaces. Protect exposed materials against weather. J. Do not store dressed or treated lumber outdoors. Contract #168-03 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 2 K. Store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified, only in areas where relative humidity has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content can be maintained with a tolerance of plus or minus 1 %. L. Advise Contractor of heating or cooling requirements for installation areas and for maintaining required temperature until Owner's acceptance of the work. M. Deliver, store and handle exterior gypsum sheathing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Western Wood Products Association, "Grading Rules for Western Lumber". B. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading rules for Southern Pine Lumber". C. Product Standard of NSB, "Product Standard P3-166 for Softwood Plywood/Construction and Industrial". D. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. Indicate by transmittal form that copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Provide lumber complying with lumber producer's inspection agency grading rules certified as conforming to the "National Grading Rules for Dimension Lumber" by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC). Dress dimensional lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 FRAMING A. Roof and Floor Joists shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. B. Studs shall be Stud Grade, Douglas Fir -Larch, 19 % maximum moisture content. C. Other Framing Material shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. D. Grounds and Nailer shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. 2.03 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES A. Provide size, type, materials and finish for each application, complying with the following: Contract #168-03 1. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2. Nails and Staples: FS FF-N-105. 3. Tacks: FS FF-N-103. 4. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111. 5. Bolts and Studs: FS FF-B-575. 6. Nuts: FS FF-N-836. 7. Washers: FS FF-W-92. CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 3 8. Lag Screws or Lag Bolts: FS FF-B-561. 9. Expansion Shields, Expansion Nails and Drive Screw Devices: FS FF-S-325. 10. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588. 11. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A 575 carbon steel bars. 2.04 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Treat wood, including lumber and plywood, shown or scheduled as 'Exterior Treated" or specified herein to be treated, to comply with the applicable requirements of the American Wood Preservers Institute (AWPI). B. Pressure treat the following items with water -borne preservatives for above ground use, complying with AWPI-LP-22: 1. Nailers, blocking, stripping and similar members in connection with roofing and flashing systems. 2. Kiln -dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 15 % after treatment with water -borne preservatives. 2.05 FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED A. All wood concealed in wall, ceiling or roof framing construction required to have a fire -rated assembly shall be fire -retardant treated. Wood must pass U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1 and No. 32-7 and must not have a flame spread of over 25. B. Exposed wood for paint or transparent finish shall not be fire -retardant treated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer must examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry Contract #168-03 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 4 work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Anchors shall be installed where specified or shown on the Drawings to anchor carpentry to masonry or concrete. Anchors for wall partition sills may be 1/2" bolts 12" long spaced 6 fee o.c. or power driven nails at 3 feet o.c. C. A moisture seal or barrier shall be placed under or around wood members which bear on or are embedded in concrete or masonry. Seal shall be asphalt mastic, or other approved type. D. Provide wood grounds and blocking of size and shape required for plaster work, for securing toilet accessories, finish hardware, door stops, and trim for chalkboards, tackboards, etc. Install true to line, level plumb, and well secured in place. Wood blocking or milers on dry wall metal framing systems shall be bolted in place. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor shall perform such work in his line as is usually required for plumbing, heating, electrical or other mechanics. He shall also furnish, of required sizes and forms, all furring at otherwise shown or specified, rough brackets, forms, etc., as required to properly carry out the intent of the work as shown by Drawings and Specifications. 3.03 TEMPORARY CLOSURES A. Protect all door openings, and other openings except windows when so required, with temporary batten doors, in plastered portions where conditions require. 3.04 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall do all work necessary to cover and protect all masonry window sills and metal and wood door jambs and protect all new carpentry work or material from damage of any character. B. Any work damaged through neglect of above causes or by any other means shall be replaced by Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. End of Section { Contract #168-03 CONCRETE SEALER Section 07.180 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes the preparation work and the furnishing and application of a concrete sealer over all horizontal surfaces of interior and exterior concrete paving. B. Furnish all materials, tools, accessories, labor and services required to provide a complete, satisfactory and watertight installation. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 03.300 Concrete Work 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Applicator shall have a minimum of five years experience in commercial applications of the quality and scope specified in this section, and shall be a certified applicator by the manufacturer. The Applicator shall submit a copy of the manufacturer's certification with the quotation for this work. B. All materials shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. C. Test a small area of surface before starting general application to ensure desired results. Low pressure airless spray tip (pressure not to exceed 10 lbs.) is recommended for best application. Brush may also be used. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review complete product data for each product required in this section. B. Submit manufacturer's instructions for handling, storage and application for each product required in this section. C. Submit manufacturer's maintenance and repair instructions. D. Submit material certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that each material complies with the requirements of this section. A. At the completion of the project, the Applicator shall submit three copies of an unlimited one (1) year warranty covering materials and workmanship. The submitted warranty shall include the manufacturer's material warranty. B. The warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall cover the following conditions which result from either material or workmanship defects: 1. Moisture penetration through the coating to the substrate. 2. Peeling or flaking of the water repellent coating. 3. Unsightly surface appearance, such as moderate to severe darkening of the surface appearance or an irregular pattern of values on the surface. Contract #168-03 CONCRETE SEALER Section 07.180 Page 2 D. The warranty coverage shall include all materials, services, labor, equipment, tools and accessories to return the sealer to a watertight condition at no cost to the Owner. E. The warranty shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. �« 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealer materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages and containers t..d bearing the manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Contents by volume. 4. Thinning instructions (if permitted). 5. Application instructions. 6. Handling instructions and precautions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 45°F. (7°C.)in. a well ventilated area. Maintain containers used in storage of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Protect sealer materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measurers to ensure that workmen and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application. D. The sealer material shall be thoroughly stirred before and occasionally during use. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surface, air and material temperatures shall not be lower than 40' F. during application. B. Weather shall be clear. There shall be no precipitation during application or expected for 12-24 hours following application. C. Areas not subject to natural ventilation shall have positive ventilation provided throughout the application. D. Surfaces to be treated can be slightly damp, but for best results, a dry surface is recommended. E. Personnel shall be warned against contact of materials with skin or eyes. F. Protect surfaces to remain uncoated during application. Use drop cloths or masking if required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Sealer shall be equivalent to THOROSHIELD as manufactured by ChemRex. i 1 ......... Contract #168-03 CONCRETE SEALER Section 07.180 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. All materials handling, preparation work and application work shall be in strict accordance with Concrete Sealer Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Notify Architect in writing of any conditions requiring additional preparation prior to application. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Joint sealant work shall be complete and fully cured prior to the application of concrete sealer. B. Keep concrete sealer products from freezing in containers. C. Clean all surfaces to receive concrete sealer. D. Stir concrete sealer gently for 1 to 3 minutes. Avoid over -agitation. Do not dilute. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Apply two coats of concrete sealer to a clean, dry surface with a soft bristle brush or a 1/4 inch nap roller. Do not spray. B. Apply only when surface temperature is above 400 F (40 Q. C. Remove excess material from brush or roller to avoid foaming buildup during application. D. Apply evenly. Do not allow puddles or a heavy surface film to develop. E. Coverage rates shall be appropriate for the porosity and finish of the substrate, and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. Allow a minimum of 2 to 4 hours cure time prior to applying the second coat. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean finish surfaces which come in contact with concrete sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. All debris and extra materials resulting from the work of this section shall be removed from the site. End of Section No Text Contract #168-03 BUILDING INSULATION Section 07.210 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide batt type insulation at interior walls and ceilings where shown on the Drawings. B. Provide all materials, accessories, labor and services required for a complete and satisfactory installation. C. Building Insulation associated with Metal Building Systems shall be furnished and installed under Section 13.122. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Batt type insulation shall be unfaced fiberglass sound attenuation batt insulation as manufactured by CertainTeed, thicknesses and R values as noted on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until substrate is satisfactory. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case; including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the conditions of the project, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. C. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated. Insulation shall extend to the roof deck. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. D. Apply a single layer of insulation of the thickness indicated. Attach units to substrate to provide permanent placement and support of units. Contract #168-03 BUILDING INSULATION Section 07.210 Page 2 E. Insulation shall be butted tightly together. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all excess materials from the site. End of Section Contract #168-03 SITE GRADING Section 02.210 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL } 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Work of the section includes the providing compacting and finish grading of topsoil within the limits of grading shown on the site plan. B. Provide all materials, equipment and services required to meet the requirements of this section. �., 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features to remain. Any damage caused Li by the Contractor shall be repaired immediately at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS t. 4 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil is defined as Amarillo fine sandy loam soil. B. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 3/4" in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TOPSOIL A. Provide a minimum depth of 6 inches of topsoil over all site areas which are not shown to be paved within the limits of grading. 3.02 COMPACTION A. Compact top 6 inches of topsoil at 90 percent maximum dry density. 3.03 GRADING A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading, including adjacent transition areas. B. Provide uniform, compacted grading between new elevations. C. Provide uniform, compacted grading between new elevations and existing grades at the limits of grading. D. Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. 3.04 GRADING TOLERANCE Contract #168-03 SITE GRADING Section 02.210 Page 2 A 3.05 A. Finish areas receiving topsoil shall be graded and compacted to not greater than 0.10 foot above or below the finish grades shown on the Drawings. EXCESS MATERIALS Remove all excess materials from the site. End of Section Contract #168-03 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes miscellaneous interior and exterior caulking and sealant work not specifically covered by other sections of these Specifications. B. All junctures of dissimilar finish materials shall be caulked or sealed to provide a finished condition. C. All penetrations through walls, floors or ceilings that are not required to be fireproofed shall be completely sealed to reduce sound transference through the assemblies. D. Furnish all materials, and perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, priming, caulking and sealing indicated by the Drawings and specified herein. E. The work of this section includes the sealing of new thresholds installed under section 08.710. F. The work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, sealing all of the following conditions: 1. Intersections of concrete paving to vertical surfaces. 4 2. Expansion joints in concrete walks and paving. 3. Joints where concrete paving abuts dissimilar materials. 4. Intersections of aluminum frames and steel. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Section 09.260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems C. Section 09.900 Painting 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the requirements of this section. 1. ChemRex, Inc. 2. Dow Corning Corporation 3. General Electric Company 4. Gibson -Homan Company 5. W. R. Grace and Company 6. Mameco International, Inc. 7. Morton International, Inc. 8. Products Research and Chemical Corporation 9. Sika Corporation 10. Sonnebom Building Products, Inc. 11. Tremco 12. USG Contract #168-03 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 2 B. The Caulking and Sealant Contractor shall employ personnel skilled in the caulking and sealant application conditions required for this project. 1.05 REFERENCES l A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA. B. TRC - Tremco Research Center, Tremco Inc., Cleveland, OH., C. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Northbrook, IL. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's published data for caulking and sealants. B. Submit material safety data sheets. C. Submit two sealant for by the Architect. sets of cured color samples selection 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of materials: 1. Deliver materials to the job site in new, dry, unopened, and well -marked containers showing product and manufacturer's name. 2. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. B. Do not order ect materials or start work before receiving data review from the Architect. prof product comments C. Storage of materials: 1. Store materials marked "keep from freezing" in areas where temperatures will remain above 40°F. 2. No materials may be stored in open or in contact with ground. 3. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. D. Material handling: ( 1. Material handling equipment shall be selected and operated so as not to damage existing construction. Do not operate or situate material handling equipment in locations that will hinder smooth flow of vehicular r or pedestrian traffic. ` } 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Field measurements and material quantities: l .� 1. Applicator shall have sole responsibility for accuracy of all measurements, estimates of material ( ) quantities and sizes and conditions that will affect work. c B. Safety requirements: 1. All application, material handling and associated equipment shall conform to and be operated in (l ....... . Contract #168-03 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 3 conformance with OSHA safety requirements. 2. Comply with federal, state, local and Owner fire and safety requirements. 3. Advise Owner whenever work is expected to be hazardous to Owner, employees, and/or operators. 4. Maintain fire extinguisher within easy access whenever power tools are being used. C. Environmental requirements: 1. Do not work in presence of water. 2. Do not work in temperatures below 40°F. 3. Do not install materials marked "keep from freezing" when daily temperatures are scheduled to fall below 40°F. 4. Do not perform masonry work below 40°F. 5. Remove any work exposed to freezing. 6. Advise Owner when volatile materials are to be used near air ventilation intakes so that they can be shut down or blocked as Owner requires. 1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. When a particular make or trade name is specified, it shall be indicative of the quality standard required. Bidders may propose substitutes in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and section 01600. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Submit a warranty covering all materials and workmanship for work furnished and installed under this section. B. Warranty shall be unlimited, covering both materials and workmanship. C. Warranty shall cover leaks which result from either material or workmanship defects, shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. D. The warranty period shall be for one (1) year, and shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with quality control, references, specifications and manufacturer's data. Products containing asbestos are prohibited on this project. Use only asbestos -free products. B. Use products with personal protection. User must read container label and material safety data sheets prior to use. C. Compatibility: Provide sealers, fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience as warranted, by one manufacturer. D. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealant, as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Up to three colors will be selected. Contract #168-03 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 4 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Purpose shall be equivalent to Vulkem 116 polyurethane sealant as manufactured by Tremco. B. Exterior Paving Joint (or "Traffic Grade") Sealant, shall be equivalent to Sonnebom SL2 polyuerethane sealant by ChemREX, Inc. (for horizontal exterior paving to horizontal exterior paving surfaces). C. Exterior Paving Joint (or "Traffic Grade") Sealant, shall be equivalent to Thiokol 2p polysulfide sealant by Morton International (for horizontal exterior paving to exterior vertical surfaces). D. Exterior Wall Joint Sealant shall be equivalent to Dow Coming 790 Silicone Building Sealant. E. Exterior Aluminum Frame to Metal Sealant shall be equivalent to Dow Coming 790 Silicone Building Sealant. F. Interior Caulk shall be equivalent to Sonnebom Sonolac, siliconized acrylic latex caulk. Caulk shall be acceptable to paint manufacturer for receiving the scheduled latex or oil base paints. G. Backing Rods shall be closed cell polyurethane as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the application conditions encountered. H. Sound Sealant shall be equivalent to USG Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant. I. Sealant Primer shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of surface application and condition encountered. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine all surfaces to receive caulking or sealant and report all conditions which are not acceptable to the General Contractor. Installation shall be deemed as acceptance of the surfaces. B. Clean all surfaces thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material and previously applied paint or primer. For all metal and glass surfaces that are to be sealed with a silicone sealant, use isopropyl alcohol as a cleaning liquid. Pour or squirt the liquid onto a clean cloth. Wipe vigorously to remove surface contaminants. Rotate the cloth to a clean area and rewipe until no dirt or oily material is evident on the cloth. Immediately wipe the liquid cleaned area with a second clean, dry cloth. Clean only as much as can be sealed in one hour. Change cloths frequently as they become dirty. C. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.02 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life and application procedure. B. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. C. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size, or other appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints. Contract #168-03 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 5 D. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. E. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. F. Sealants shall slop away from vertical substrates. G. Ensure a'/ inch minimum thickness of sealant over all backer rods. 3.03 JOINT SIZES A. The width of a sealant joint shall not be less than 1/8 inch. B. In joints up to '/ inch wide, sealant depth shall be '/4 inch. C. In joints from'/4 inch to % inch wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. D. For joints wider than''/Z inch, but not exceeding 2 inches, the depth shall be maintained at'/Z inch. E. For joints wider than 2 inches, consult with the sealant manufacturer's technical services department. F. In all joints'/4 inch or wider, the sealant shall be applied over a backing rod. 3.04 APPLICATION OF CAULKING A. Caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface. B. Apply caulking with a pressure gun having nozzle of proper size to fit joint. C. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and ensure good adhesion. D. Caulking shall develop a firm skin prior to applications of paint. 3.05 APPLICATION OF SOUND CONTROL SEALANT A. Minimum sealant depth shall be 3/8 inch minimum, and shall completely seal all openings around and between penetrations. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant excesses or smears. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Leave all finished work in a neat and clean condition. C. Remove all debris and extra materials resulting from the work of this section from the site. End of Section Contract #168-03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown on the Drawings and Schedules; all shall be custom hollow metal work. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 08.700 Finish Hardware. B. Section 08.800 Glass and Glazing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hollow metal doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work. B. The Contractor shall not submit any hollow metal manufacturer for the Architect's approval without first verifying that the proposed manufacturer's facilities are adequate to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The manufacturer shall have been in the business for at least five years and shall have a record for financial responsibility and for doing work of the quality required by the Contract Documents. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications -Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute. B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), as applicable to fire rated hollow metal door frames. C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements. D. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon, Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. E. ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, cold -Rolled, Electrolyte Zinc Coated. F. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of hollow metal doors and frames. Includes details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of Contract #168-03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 2 construction, locations and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details of joints and connections. Show anchorages and necessary items. B. Samples 1. Submit 12" x 12" sample comer section of typical frame showing details of construction and finish. 2. Submit 12" x 12" sample corner section of typical door showing details of construction and finish. 3. Submit samples of all accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the contract Documents. 1. HOLLOW METAL Steelcraft Overly Manufacturing Company Williamsburg Steel Products Company Superior Door & Sash Company Republic Steel Corporation Hol-O-Met, Inc. Tex -Steel Corporation 2.02 MATERIALS A. METAL: ASTM A366, gauges as specified for each particular member. B. PAINT: Zinc -Chromate Alkyd resin primer for baked primer, Fed. Spec. TT-P-645. C. INSULATION: Mineral wool batt insulation, thickness as required for door thickness. 2.03 FABRICATION A. DOORS 1. Fabricate doors from cold rolled, pickled and oiled, stretcher leveled steel; 18 gauge face sheets. Use16 gauge for channel frame and 22 gauge for interlocking vertical channels or 'Y' shaped member reinforcing. 2. Construct doors rigid, neat and free from defects, with continuous welded joints at door edges dressed smooth and invisible. No joints shall occur on face of the door. 3. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap with templates, frames to receive all mortise hardware. Provide reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware. Reinforce for hinges with 7 gauge steel; for locks and other hardware cutouts with 12 gauge steel; for surface applied hardware with 12 gauge steel. C Contract #168-03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 3 4. Provide 1/8" clearance at jambs and heads; 3/16" at meeting stiles of pairs of doors; 3/8" at sills, except fire doors and where indicated otherwise. Bevel lock edge of stiles 1/8" in 2". 5. Provide cutouts and stops for glass and glazing furnished under Section 08.800. B. FRAMES 1. Form metal frames to size and shapes indicated from cold rolled, pickled and oiled steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces. Fabricate all frames from 14 gauge steel.. 2. Construct frames strong, rigid, neat and free from defects, true and fully welded unit type construction at joints. Miter joints and continuously arc -weld full depth and width of frames. Dress smooth and invisible, welds of joints on exposed surfaces. 3. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap with templates, frames to receive mortise hardware. Provide reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware. Reinforce for hinges with 7 gauge steel; for locks and other hardware cutouts with 12 gauge steel; for surface applied hardware with 12 gauge steel. 4. Provide 26 gauge galvanized cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts. Punch frames for rubber or vinyl silencers; three on lock side of single doors and one for each leaf in heads of double door frames. 5. Provide jamb anchors for frames set in metal stud partitions, welded to back of frames, not less than 18 gauge, of design required for type of stud, 4 anchors for openings up to T-6" and one additional anchor for each additional 30" height or part thereof. Locate anchors immediately above each hinge reinforcing plate and one below the top hinge reinforcing on both sides. 6. Provide 16 gauge steel fixed floor clips fastened to bottom of each jamb member and drill for 3/8" anchor bolts for floor connection. 7. Provide temporary steel spreaders fastened across bottom of frames. Label each frame before shipping with metal or plastic tags to show their location, size door swing and other pertinent information. 2.04 SHOP PAINTING A. Clean ferrous metal and treat chemically to prepare for maximum paint adhesion. Apply coat of rust - inhibitive metal primer by spraying or dipping. Bake or oven -dry prime coat to secure hard, abrasion - resistant finish. Finish surfaces smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Leave shipping spreaders on frames until complete wall system surrounding the frame is rigidly secured to frame, floors and ceilings. Set bottom anchors of frame to floor with power -driven fasteners or expansion bolts (not lead shields). Contract #168-03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 4 C. Hang doors in frames as scheduled. Welding of hinges to doors or frames will not be permitted. Follow recommendations of the manufacturer for installation of the hardware. Install hardware in location as provided by door manufacturer. D. Coat contact surfaces of any dissimilar metals with bituminous, base paint and let dry before installation. E. Install all surface mounted hardware taking care that all attachment devices are anchored in their reinforcement materials inside the door frames. F. After installation, adjust all hardware items for correct, easy and efficient operation. G. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within the following clearances: Jambs and Head: 3/32". Bottom at Threshold or Carpet: 1/8". Bottom: 3/8"where no threshold or carpet. H. Install hollow metal frames plumb and square, in correct location indicated on drawings and with a maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16 inch. Ensure frames are securely and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. I. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust all operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all smudge, dirt, oil, grease or adhered materials which might affect painting. Remove all excess materials and debris from Site. Air,-- - End of Section Contract #168-03 OVERHEAD DOORS Section 08.331 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of overhead doors is shown on the Drawings and schedules. B. Furnish all accessories required for a complete and satisfactory installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product literature, operating instructions, installation and maintenance instructions. B. Submit data substantiating overhead doors meets the requirements of this section. C. Submit shop drawings detailing installation and sizing, including anchoring devices. Shop drawings shall detail and list all accessories to be furnished. Details shall include framing members, required clearances, electrical power supply, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship of adjacent materials. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to jobsite in their original, unopened packages with labels intact. Inspect materials for damage and advise manufacturer immediately of any unsatisfactory materials. B. Package door assemblies in individual corrugated cartons so no portion of the doors have contact with the outer shell of the container. Package and ship frames preassembled to the greatest possible extent. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Opening preparation, miscellaneous or structural metal work, access panels, finish or field painting, field electrical wiring, wire, conduit, fuses and disconnect switches are in the Scope of Work of other divisions or trades. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide three (3) copies of a written warranty signed by the Door Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to replace, at no cost to the Owner, any doors or components which fail in materials or workmanship within the warranty period. Failure of materials or workmanship includes: excessive deflection, faulty operation of doors, deterioration of finish and defects in hardware installation. The warranty period shall be for one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OVERHEAD DOORS A. Overhead Doors shall be equivalent to Model 591 series Thermacore Insulated Steel Door manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation of Dallas, Texas. Contract #168-03 OVERHEAD DOORS Section 08.331 Page 2 B. Sectional Door Assembly: Metal/foam/metal sandwich panel construction, with EPDM thermal break and ship -lap design. Units shall have the following characteristics: 1. Panel Thickness: 1-15/8". 2. Exterior Surface: Ribbed, textured. 3. Exterior Steel: .016", hot -dipped galvanized. 4. End Stiles: 16 gauge. 5. Standard Springs: 10,000 cycles. (High cycles). 6. Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated. 7. Thermal Values: R-value of 14.86; U-value of 0.067. 8. Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfin at 15 mph; 0.08 cfin at 25 mph. 9. Partial Glazing of Steel Panels: Insulated double strength glass. Configure as shown on the Drawings C. Finish and Color: Two coat baked -on polyester with white exterior and white interior color. D. Windload Design: ANSI/DASMA 102 standards and as required by code. E. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel races.. F. Lock: Interior mounted slide lock. Keyed lock. G. Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber bulb -type strip at bottom. Header seal and jamb weatherstripping. H. Track: Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances available. I. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size and type as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second. 1. Entrapment Protection: Photoelectric sensors. 2. Operator Controls: Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons for surface mounting, for interior location. J. Furnish to fit openings indicated on the Drawings and in schedules. K. Furnish complete with curtain, weatherseals, guides, brackets, barrel, counterbalance, hood and all accessories to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead doors by an authorized distributor in the location and condition shown on the Drawings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Upon installation, doors shall be tested for proper operation. Contract #168-03 OVERHEAD DOORS Section 08.331 Page 3 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all debris, excess materials and tools resulting from the work of this section from the site. B. Clean doors prior to Owner's acceptance. End of Section 1 Contract #168-03 ALUMINUM WINDOWS `�. Section 08.520 Pagel PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS t A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. t r 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of aluminum windows is shown on the Drawings, and is as specified herein. B. The work of this section includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment and services to furnish and install aluminum windows. C. Aluminum windows shall be factory glazed. 1,03 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Prior to manufacturing, the Contractor must submit complete shop drawings prepared by the manufacturer for the Architect's review. 2. Drawings must shown elevations, window sections, installation and anchorage details, hardware and collateral material and supplemental data for handling, storage and erection. 1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE HANDLING A. Shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Total Window System 1. One year guarantee on materials and workmanship. B. Factory Glazing 1. Five year guarantee of thermal and physical integrity of insulated glass units. i C. Finish: Kynar Organic Coating 20 year guarantee by applicator. D. All warranties shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 4 A. Equivalent to EFCO Corporation. 2.02 MATERIALS A Aluminum be to Series 2500 2" Commercial Projected Windows by EFCO. windows shall equivalent Contract #168-03 ALUMINUM WINDOWS Section 08.520 Page 2 B. Window unit types shall be as indicated on the Drawings. C. Window unit sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. D. All operable windows shall be furnished with aluminum mesh insect screens. E. Hardware — General 1. All steel components 300 series stainless steel (SS) (except at noted) i.e.: fasteners, hold open arms, tracks, etc. 2. All aluminum components 6063T5 (T6) or 6105T6. 3. Locking handles, cases, and strikes, die cast or stainless steel. 4. Roto operator housings white bronze, aluminum/zinc cast alloys or brushed nickel. Arms heavy plated steel. Hardened steel gears and brushings. F. Thermal Break 1. Frame and vent: Factory poured -in -place polyurethane into prefmished cavity in manufacturer's plant providing minimum '/a" separation. G. Weatherstrip 1. Extruded prongs neoprene meeting ASTM C509. H. GLAZING: All windows shall be factory glazed with 1" insulating glass with muntins between glass. Units shall be arranged for interior glazing, and shall be "wet glazed" with a snap -in aluminum extruded glazing bead and PVC bulb on the interior of the glass. Plastic or vinyl glazing beads will not be permitted. The exterior of the glass shall be set in a continuous bead of silicone backbed compound to be GE SCS-2511 or equivalent. Glass shall have a low E coating on the #2 surface. Coating shall have a minimum U value of 0.56 Imperial, summer. I. STANDARD SCREENS: Provide half screens on all single hung and casement windows. Standard screens shall consist of extruded (or roll -formed) tubular frame, 18 x 16 mesh aluminum screen cloth, frame painted to match window frame, and removable splines. 2.03 FINISHES A. 70% FLUOROPOLYMER COATING: Meeting AAMA 605.2 and factory applied and oven baked by a licensed applicator per ASTM D 1730 type B and B449, section 5 with a conversion coating weight minimum of 30 mg/ft and a film thickness minimum of 1.2 mils. Recessed areas to be covered to extent possible. 1. Color shall be standard, as selected by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site opening conditions. Contract #168-03 ALUMINUM WINDOWS Section 08.520 Page 3 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Windows, mullions, trim, panning, and accessories must be installed by experienced workmen in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Installation shall be plumb and level. B. After installation, metal surfaces of windows, trim, panning and mullions must be cleaned of all mortar, plaster, paint and other contaminants. C. The General Contractor will be responsible for protection of the windows and related work from damage by other trades and for final cleaning. D. Seal joints between windows and surrounding construction. Surfaces to be sealed must be dry, clean and free from loose material, efflorescence and mortar. Sealants are not to be applied when temperatures fall below the manufacturer's recommendation. Prime joints and surfaces in conformance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide joint backing in all joints where a suitable backstop to receive sealant is otherwise not available. Joints to be packed with backing to provide depth equal to 1/2 of the width. Caulk joint width will not be less than 1/4 " or greater than 1/z" unless recommended by the manufacturer and shown on details. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. After completion of window installation, windows shall be inspected, adjusted, put into working order and left clean, free of labels, dirt, etc. Protection from this point shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. B. After installation, the General Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of aluminum surfaces from damage by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid cement and other contaminants. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, abraded or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, vandalism, during the construction period. D. Wash glass on both faces not more than four days prior to date scheduled for the Substantial Completion Inspection. Wash glass as recommended by the Manufacturer. E. Remove all debris and unused materials resulting from the work of this section from the site. End of Section No Text Contract #168-03 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings and/or specified herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically mentioned, but which is necessary for proper completion of the work shown on the Drawings shall be provided with additional cost to the Owner. Any omission shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening; otherwise the Drawings and Specifications shall be considered complete. B. The Contractor shall furnish cylinders and keying for each lockset to conform to the Owner's existing system. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI Al 15.1 - Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. B. ANSI Al15.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. C. ANSI Al 15.4 - Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts. D. ANSI Al 15.5 - Frame Preparation for 181 & 190 Series Deadlock Strikes. E. ANSI Al15.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting. F. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. G. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim. H. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices. I. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers). J. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. K. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinges, 1.05 SUBMITTALS ,i -a Contract #168-03 FMSH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 2 A. As soon as practicable and not later than 10 days after award of General Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, copies of the finish hardware schedule complete with all details and a sample of each individual item as may be requested. The General Contractor shall not award contract for finish hardware until samples and schedules have been approved by the Architect. B. Finish Hardware Schedule shall be a complete detailed list of hardware required to meet requirements of the drawings and specifications. C. Provide the Architect with manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. D. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The furnishing of finish hardware shall be subcontracted only to recognized and experienced supplier and who has employed an experienced hardware consultant who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1.08 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES REQUIREMENTS A. All hardware for openings requiring UL label shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with the requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories. 1.08 TEMPLATES A. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. Check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use of doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information in the contract documents. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the times and to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as directed by the Contractor. 1.10 SECURITY A. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 1.11 QUANTITIES A. Contractor shall verify the number of doors and other parts requiring hardware listed under an item and make his own quantities in making his quotation, as he will be required to furnish hardware in accordance with the Contract #168-03 FMSH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 3 actual requirements of the Drawings. In case of any omission or error in the hardware as scheduled, furnish hardware identical to that required for similar openings, as approved by the Architect. 1.12 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The Hardware Schedule is not complete with respect to the thickness of doors, hand and backset of hardware items, method of fastening and other detail requirements. B. Thoroughly check the Drawings and Door Schedules and provide all required hardware for all openings. 1.13 KEYING A. All locksets shall be keyed by the Contractor to the existing keyway system. B. Provide 4 keys to each lockset installed in this Contract. C. All keys shall be nickel silver. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturer's is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS Sargent 2. HINGES McKinney 3. CLOSERS Sargent LCN 4. PLATES, STOPS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS Triangle Brass, Pemko, MAG 2.02 HARDWARE A. Provide items as listed in schedule at end of this section, complete to function as intended. 2.03 CLOSERS Contract #168-03 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Adjust and check each operating items of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite -type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. C. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3.5 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. E. The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be as follows: 1. Fire doors shall have a minimum um opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority. 2. Other Doors: a. exterior hinged doors: 8.5 lbf b. interior hinged doors: 5 lbf c. sliding or folding doors: 5 lbf 3. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that may hold the door in a closed position. 4. Forces for pushing or pulling doors open are measured with a push-pull gauge under the following conditions: a. Hinged Doors: Force applied perpendicular to the door opener or 30 in (760 mm) from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: Force applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch. c. Application of Force: Apply force gradually so that the applied force does not exceed the resistance of the door. Air -pressure differentials may require a modification of this specification in order to meet the functional intent. Contract #168-03 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 5 F. Door closers shall be mounted parallel arm unless specifically approved otherwise by the Architect. G. Unless directed otherwise, all hardware shall be mounted at heights as recommended by the hardware industry. The hardware schedule submitted to the Architect shall slow proposed mounting heights or locations of each hardware item. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all required hardware although not specifically mentioned; trim such openings with hardware of equal quality and design to that specified for similar openings. No claims for extras will be allowed for any services or materials which, in the Architect's opinion, should have been foreseen by the Contractor and included in the Proposal. B. Where the exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the types specified. C. Hardware supplier shall make an inspection of each items, and after completion, notify the Contractor, in writing, with a copy to the Architect, of any hardware that has been improperly installed, it being understood that the Contractor is entirely responsible for satisfactory performance of the completed work. 3.03 FASTENINGS A. Furnish hardware complete with all necessary screws, through -bolts and other fastenings of suitable type and size to assure a permanent concealed attachment and of finish to harmonize with the hardware. B. Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. Where exposed, use countersunk Phillips oval -head type screws, (flat head for hinges) and match finish of hardware being attached. Do no attach hardware to metal frames with self -tapping or sheet metal screws. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WEATHERSTRIPPING A. All weatherstripping shall be installed by experienced mechanics in accordance with methods recommended by manufacturer. B. All weatherstripping shall be continuous and not pieced in any run. Fasten all materials under this heading with screws or other fasteners to match adjacent background finish. C. Adjust weatherstripping so that installation will be permanently weathertight, permitting no infiltration of air or dust when doors are in a closed position. Leave all weatherstripping in perfect working order upon completion. Set threshold units level and accurately aligned with the frames and doors, and at the proper elevations for door operation. Shim, if necessary, for full continuous support of threshold at each edge and intermediate legs, if any. Use non -corrosive shims of metal or plastic set in adhesive or otherwise anchored against dislocation from impact forces of traffic upon the threshold. D. Notch thresholds and saddles at all jambs to ensure full width opening in one piece. Set in a bed of sealant as specified in Section 07.900 to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Contract #168-03 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 6 HDWE SET #1 DOORS: #101, 103 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES 1 EACH EXIT LEACH CLOSER 1 EACH K.P. 1 EACH THRESHOLD 1 EACH DOOR BOTTOM 1 SET W/STRIPPING HDWE SET#2 DOOR: #104 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES 1 EACH LOCK 1 EACH K.P. 1 EACH THRESHOLD 1 EACH D/B 1 SET W/STRIPPING HDWE SET #3 DOORS: #105, 106 DOOR TO HAVE: 3 1 1 1 3 HDWE SET #4 DOOR: #102 T4A3786 5 X 4 1/2 652 MCK 8813 ETL 630 SGT EN351-CPSH X TB DA 689 SGT 10" X 2" LDW 630 RWD 170A 719 PMKO 18061 CP 719 PMKO 45061 CP 719 PMKO T4A3786 5 X 41h 652 MCK 8225 LW1L 630 SGT 10" X 2" LDW 630 RWD 170A 719 PMKO 18061 CP 719 PMKO 45061 CP 719 PMKO HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 1/2 652 MCK LOCK 8265 LWIL (#105) 630 SGT LOCK 8205 LW1L (#106) 630 SGT STOP 409 630 RWD SILENCERS 1229A TRCO ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER Note: Coordinate Keying with the Owner. End of Section Contract #168-03 GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08.800 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Glass and glazing for hollow metal doors. B. Mirrors. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide a written one (1) year warranty on new materials and installation. Provide documentation that glass meets these specifications. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of glass required. Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements. Indicate that Glazier has received a copy of handling and glazing instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following manufacturers produce glass complying with the requirements of this section: 1. ASG Industries, Inc. 2. CE Glass Division of Combustion Engineering, Inc. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Libbey Owens Ford B. Mirrors shall be a minimum '/cinch thick polished plate glass with an applied white polyvinyl safety backing, polished edges, with a continuous j-mold polished aluminum trim around the perimeter, meeting ANSI 297.1, Category 1 ASTM D-1709. Provide continuous clips for secure attachment to substrates. Provide sizes and quantities indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 GLASS A. Where noted on the Drawings, glass shall be 1/4 inch thick clear polished plate tempered glass. 2.03 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Provide type and hardness of materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the required application and condition of installation in each case. Provide only compounds which are known (proven) to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted. Contract ##168-03 GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08.800 Page 2 B. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. C. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation of the building. B. Glazing channels are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. C. The Glazier must examine the framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Glazier. D. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. E. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association, except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturer of the glass and glazing materials. F. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coating which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. G. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer. H. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate any which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. I. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. J. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. K. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. L. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. M. Maintain glass in a reasonable clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by wash -off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other surfaces. N. All exterior glazing shall be installed watertight. I Contract #168-03 GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08.800 Page 3 O. Install mirrors plumb, square, level and true with wall or other substrates. 3.02 CLEANING A. After installation, mark clear glass with "X" by using tape or removable paste. B. Immediately remove droppings from finished surfaces. Remove labels after work is completed. C. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to Owner's acceptance of the Work in each area. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for all cleaning materials and procedures. End of Section i' f' f, I; I (i C fi 0 0 I I 'I Contract #168-03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Metal framing and accessories required for gypsum board and cement board. B. Gypsum board and cement board. C. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 06.100 Carpentry Work. B. Section 07.210 Building Insulation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 unless otherwise specified in this section. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water -Resistance Backing Board. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certification and test results that clearly states and indicates that each and every individual element or component of fire rated drywall system partitions is approved and appropriately rated for the specific required rated assembly in which it is to be used, and that the use of such individual element or component would in no way jeopardize the required rating of the entire assembly. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the job site in their original unopened packages, containers, and bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and brand name. B. Store material in an enclosed space protected from damage and exposure to the elements. Remove damaged material from the premises. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Provide metal framingmaterials in accordance with ASTM C 645-81 hot dipped galvanized. PP B. Studs: Screw -type Cee-shaped 20 gauge, or as required for wall heights shown. Contract #168-03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 2_ C. Runners: Galvanized, channel type, screw type, width as required by stud width, same gauge as stud. D. Fasteners and Anchorages: Self -tapping, self -drilling, as recommended by drywall manufacturer. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. DRYWALL SYSTEMS The Celotex Corporation The Flintkote Company ` Georgia-Pacific Corporation Kaiser Gypsum National Gypsum Company United States Gypsum Company B. Drywall systems for fire rated partitions, if required, shall be constructed using either, all component parts of one manufacturer or, individually approved and rated components which are totally compatible with the entire required rated assembly and which would in no way jeopardize the rating of the entire assembly. Drywall system shall meet test requirements approved by the Local Building Officials. All exit corridor walls shall be of one hour fire rated construction. C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, Type "X", tapered edge, 5/8 inch thick, fire rated at fire rated assemblies, e unless otherwise indicated. D. Cement Board: equivalent to USG Durock Cement Board, 1/2 inch thick 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS - A. Lathing Channels: 16 gauge cold rolled steel, black asphaltum painted, 3/4" and 1 'h". B. Screws: Self -drilling, self -tapping, type as recommended by the Drywall Manufacturer. C. Nails: ASTM C380, annular ring type. s= � D. Comer Bead: Galvanized steel, perforated flange, USG Dur-A-Bead. E. Edging and Casing: Galvanized steel for painting. USG 200B, size as required for gypsum wallboard thickness. F. Control Joint Casing: USG #093. G. Adhesive: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. ASTM C475. H. Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant. i I. Wire: Galvanized, 9-gauge hanger wire, 16-gauge tie wire. J. Reinforcingtoe Joint Compound, Water Fasteners: As recommended b Manufacturer.` tape, P Y K. Fuming Channels: USG hat -shaped 25 ga. metal furring channels. Contract #168-03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DRYWALL PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Starting work shall be construed as acceptance of spaces. B. Maintain in cold weather uniform controlled range temperature between 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. during the installation. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture. C. Install gypsum drywall systems in accordance with the Gypsum Drywall Contractors International, Underwriters Laboratory and the manufacturer of the Drywall material. 3.02 METAL STUD FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754. B. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. C. Floor and Ceiling Runner Tracks: Align runner tracks to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved, except do not exceed 16" o.c. spacing. Provide at all corners and ends of runner tracks. D. Use full length studs between runner tracks wherever possible. If necessary, splice studs by nesting with a minimum lap or 8" and fasten laps with 2 screws through each flange. Friction fit studs to runner tracks by positioning and rotating into place. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at partition comers and intersections, and adjacent to openings, using 3/8" self -tapping screws or stud clinching tool on both flanges of studs. E. Size and Spacing: Use studs of the sizes shown and install at the spacing shown. Provide 16" o.c. spacing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. F. Provide additional studs to support inside comers at partition intersections and comers, and to support outside comers, terminations of partitions and both sides of control joints (if any). G. Provide rough framing at openings consisting of double full-length studs adjacent to jambs and horizontal header and sill tracks. Cut horizontal tracks to length and split flanges and bend webs at ends for flange overlap and screw to jamb studs. Install cut -to -length, intermediate studs between jamb studs at head and sill sections, at same spacing as full-length studs. H. At door frames, provide rough framing as required for door frame dimensions and tolerances. I. Tops of all partitions not continuing to roof deck shall be solidly braced to overhead or adjacent construction by means of steel channels (1 '/2" minimum) or other means approved by Architect. Wood construction shall not be used. J. Provide 2 x 6 fire retardant treated wood blocking in drywall where toilet accessories or other items are scheduled to be attached. Verify the heights of the blocking with the requirements of the Drawings and the manufacturer of the item to be attached. All wood blocking shall be fire -retardant treated wood in compliance with Uniform Building Code Standard Number 42-1. Contract #168-03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 4 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD AND CEMENT BOARD A. Comply with the requirements recommended by the manufacturer. The term "Manufacturer" defines the gypsum wallboard manufacturer unless otherwise noted. Comply with all requirements for specified fire -resistance ratings. B. Provide drywall of the thickness shown on the Drawings. C. Provide additional framing and blocking as required to support gypsum board at openings and cutouts, and to support built-in anchorage and attachment devices for other work. D. Form control joints in drywall construction where shown. All 1" continuous opening between edges of adjacent drywall board to all for insertion of control joint trim accessory. E. Partition/Walls: apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally at Contractor's option, with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud on opposite faces of partition/walls. Stagger joints of adjacent sheets of gypsum boards if applied horizontally. F. Fasten gypsum wallboard with screws. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed 12" o.c. spacing. G. Caulk sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely seal openings and joints. A. Apply wallboard to ceilings before applying to vertical surfaces. Install wallboard to ceilings with long edge perpendicular to supports using longest pieces practicable. Stagger end joints and provide support for all edges. Apply sealant at joint between edge of wallboard at floor and at ceiling. I. Fit wallboard snugly into steel door frames. Cut wallboard neatly to fit around all outlets and switch boxes. Install metal edge trim along top edge of all wallboard at ceiling and wherever wallboard edge is exposed, or abuts another material. Install comer bead at all exterior comers. J. Apply second layer of gypsum board sheets, if required, perpendicular to base layer. 3.04 CEILING INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install the suspension system per the recommendation of ASTM C636. Deflection of any component must not exceed 1/360 of the span. B. Suspend main beams spaced 4'-0" on center from structure with wire hangers spaced 4'-0" on center. Install main beams level within 1/8 inch in 12 feet with hanger wire taut and tightly wrapped to prevent vertical movement or rotation. Do not make local kinks or bends in hanger wires as a means of leveling. C. Install cross tees at right angles to main beams, space at T-0" on center and join to main beams with positive interlock. Install cross tees to within 1/32 inch of their required location and within 0.015 inch of the same horizontal plane as main beam, and never below continuous member. D. Lay ends of main beams and cross tees on angle moldings at vertical surfaces. Provide additional hanger wires at each comer of recessed light troffers and other concentrated load conditions to prevent deflection. E. Install cross tees at right angles to beams and cross tees to support ends of recessed light fixtures, diffusers grilles. Contract #168-03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 5 3.05 CONTROL JOINTS A. Locate control joints as indicated but not to exceed 50'-0" in either direction for ceilings and not to exceed 30'-0" on center for partitions. Locate control joints where wallboard abuts any dissimilar wall or ceiling assembly and where wallboard construction changes within the same plane. B. Install control joint casing where control joint occurs in continuous wall surface. Make joint 1/4" wide with supports noncontinuous over joint. Install metal edging where wallboard abuts any structural element or dissimilar material. Make joint 1/8" wide and fill with sealant. s 3.06 DRYWALL FINISHING _J A. Do not install joint treatment compounds unless installation areas comply with minimum temperature and ventilation requirements recommended by the manufacturer and conditions are acceptable to the Installer. B. Finish exposed drywall surfaces with joints, comers and exposed edges reinforced or trimmed as specified, and with all joints, fastener heads, trim necessary flanges and surface defects filled with joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a smooth, flush surface. Drywall finishing work will not be considered acceptable if corners or edges do not form true, level or plumb lines, or if joints fastener heads, flanges of trim accessories or defects are visible after application of field -applied decoration. C. Use joint tape to reinforce joints formed by tapered edges or butt ends of drywall units and at interior comers and angles. Set tape in jourt compound then apply skim coat over tape in one application. D. Outside comers and joints shall be floated a minimum of 18 inches in each direction from the comer or joint to provide a level drywall surface which completely masks the comers and joints. E. Where open spaces of more than 1/16" width occur between abutting drywall units, (except at control joints), prefill joints with joint compound and allow prefill to dry before application of joint tape. F. Reinforce external comers of drywall work with specified type of corner bead. G. Securely fasten metal comer beads as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use fastens which cannot be fully concealed by joint compound fill applied over flanges. H. Provide specified type of metal casing bead trim. Install in single unjointed lengths unless run exceeds longest available stock length. Miter comers of semi -finishing type trim. I. Use only compatible compounds from one manufacturer. After mixing, do not use joint compounds if recommended pot -life time has expired. 3.07 CLEANING AND PATCHING A. Clean exposed surfaces of wallboard of all soil and stains that would affect finish. Repair or remove and replace defective work. Remove excess materials and debris from Site. End of Section Contract #168-03 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09.510 Pagel PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish materials, labor and equipment, as required by the Contract Documents, to provide and install acoustical ceilings. 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Acoustical Materials Association: 1. "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceiling Suspension Systems." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. 12 inch x 12 inch sample of each type of acoustical unit. 2. 12 inch samples of suspension system including: a. Main beam b. Cross tee connection c. Angle moldings _ B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's data showing compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Maintenance Instructions: 1. Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing each type acoustical unit. 2. Include precautions against materials and methods detrimental to finishes and acoustical efficiency. D. Warranty: 1. The Contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the Warranty. 2. The following shall be adjudged as defective work: Loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of materials. 3. Furnish three copies of the Manufacturer's warranty for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract the acoustic ceiling and related work to an Installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary acoustic materials. Contract #168-03 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09.510 Page 2 B. Subcontract the installing of suspended acoustic ceiling materials to the Installer of the ceiling suspension systems for single responsibility. C. The Installer must examine the condition under which acoustic ceiling work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the acoustic ceiling work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. D. Deliver acoustic ceiling materials to the job site in original, unopened packages, bearing manufacturer's name and label identifying each type of acoustic unit. E. Coordinate layout with other work which penetrated or is supported by ceiling suspension system. F. Comply with acoustic material manufacturer's recommendations for storage of units to be used in the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exposed suspension grid system for acoustical panels: 1. Suspension system shall be equivalent to USG Centricitee (DX) 15/16" face, white, 2'x2' grid, non fire rated. B. Wire Hangers: 1. Not less than 12 gauge (0. 106" diameter), galvanized carbon steel wire per ASTM A 641. 2. Where hanger wires cannot be directly wire -tied to structural or intermediate framing members, provide attachment devices designed for the type of construction used in the work and with a carrying capacity of not less than 3 times the design loads involved. C. Acoustical Panels: 1. Acoustical Panels shall be equivalent to USG Sandrift # 808, 2'x2'x3/4" (SL), white, non fire rated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Installed ceiling system shall meet requirements of "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceiling Suspension System," published by the Acoustical Materials Association. B. Install acoustical treatment after moist materials have been installed. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied but not less than 50 degrees or more than 85 degrees F. before, during and after installation. C. Prior to start of acoustic ceiling work, consult other trades and contractors involved to determine areas of potential interference. Do not start installation of suspension systems until interferences have been resolved. Contract #168-03 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09.510 Page 3 3.02 LAYOUT A. The acoustical panels shall be installed as shown on the Reflected Ceiling Plans on the Drawings. Unless shown otherwise on the Reflected Ceiling Plans, in general, the acoustical panels shall be symmetrical about the center lines of the room in both directions and edge panels on opposite sides of each room shall be equal in width. 3.03 SUSPENSION A. Suspension Systems: 1. Suspension system shall comply with ASTM C 635, "Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings." Suspension system shall be classified "intermediate" duty. B. Molding: 1. Install angle molding around perimeter of room at proper level. 2. Miter angle molding at exterior comers; 3. Cut flanges and bend web at interior corners; 4. Exposed leg shall be in same plane as bottom flange of main beam and cross tees. C. Hangers: 1. Hang main beams at 4 feet on centers with hangers spaced at 4 feet on centers. 2. Wrap hangers around beams or joists and twist at least 3 full turns. 3. Where hanger wires cannot be wrapped around structural members, provide: a. Attachment devices for the type of construction (Vertical screws up into wood are not acceptable.) b. With a carrying capacity of at least 5 times the design loads. 4. Space hangers not more than 6 inches from each end. 5. Provide additional hangers for support of other items to be supported by the suspension system, including all light fixtures. 6. Hangers shall be plumb: a. If splayed hangers cannot be avoided; b. Provide counter splay, bracing or other suitable offsetting members. 7. Hang beams level: a. Do not make kinks or bends in hanger wires to level. 8. Tightly wrap beams to prevent vertical movement or rotation. a. Twist wires at least 3 full turns. D. Grid: 1. Install cross beams at right angles to main beams. 2. Space 2 feet on centers. 3. Join beams to positive interlock. a. Within 1/32 inch of required location. b. Within 0.015 (1/64) inch of horizontal plane. c. Never below a continuous member. 3.04 ACOUSTICAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General 1. Position acoustical units on flanges of inverted tees. Contract #168-03 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09.510 Page 4 2. Cut and fit acoustical units closely and accurately around recessed light fixtures, grilles or other ceiling items. 3. Throw away and replace units that are damaged. B. Shall be by an applicator who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the units. C. Do not install acoustic ceiling until installation areas meet the following criteria. Exterior openings have been closed and roofs are weathertight. Concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting work has dried out. Mechanical, electrical and other work above ceilings have been completed. Wet work has been installed and completed. Temperature and relative humidity have reached levels which comply with acoustic material manufacturer's recommendations for the units to be used in the work and are acceptable to the Installer. D. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and other recommendations applicable to the work. E. All acoustical unit surfaces shall be true and free from irregularities; joints shall be straight and continuous. All units at walls, columns and openings shall be scribed accurately. 3.05 FURRING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS A. All Mechanical and Electrical items occurring immediately below acoustical ceilings: 1. Shall be furred in with the acoustical ceiling materials whether shown on the Drawings or not. 2. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical drawings for a complete description of items. 3.06 COOPERATION A. This Contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling installation, to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this Contract. Installation of tile shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been completed and inspected, and the Architect's approval has been obtained to proceed. The Contractor shall give the Architect advance notices for inspection. 3.07 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Touch-up or replace damaged ceiling grids. B. Replace damaged and stained acoustical panels. C. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. D. Remove all debris, tools and extra material resulting from the work of this Section from the site. End of Section Contract #168-03 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL, 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of painting work is shown on the Drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and filler and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. C. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are denoted in schedules, except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors available for the materials systems specified. D. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory -finishing or Installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, doors and equipment. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas. 4. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each materials proposed for use. Transmit a copy of each manufacturer's instructions to the paint applicator. B. Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat of each finish sample. Contract #168-03 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 2 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's name. 5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. C. Store clean rags, paint and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.05 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.06 EXTRA PAINT A. Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner one (1) gallon of each color and type of paint used. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all work performed under this contract for a period of one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Completion. Cracking, fading, peeling and scaling of paint shall be judged as defective work. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees and 90 degrees F., unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity exceeds 85 %; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.09 COLORS AND FINISHES A. Paint finishes are indicated in the schedules of the contract documents. Contract #168-03 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 3 B. Prior to beginning work, the Architect will furnish a color schedule for surfaces to be painted. 1. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. C. Color Pigments to be pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit the substrates and service indicated. D. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by Pittsburgh Paint Company unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pratt and Lambert, DuPont, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, Devoe, Cook, TCI and Kelly -Moore may be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. C. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. D. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead and mercury free and shall be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous Substances Act. E. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. F. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 2.02 MIXING AND TINTING A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by the Architect. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed by manufacturer: do not exceed thinning directions. Contract #168-03 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. B. Notify the Architect in writing of such unacceptable conditions. C. Do not proceed with surface preparations or coating applications until conditions are suitable. D. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint firm. E. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 3.02 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. B. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted shall be clean before painting. C. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. D. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. E. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with putty after first coat. Color to match finish. B. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Clean marred shop coats and touch-up with primer. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. D. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or hidden comer molds. B. Apply paint, stain, and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers, as recommended by manufacturer. Spray application will be allowed only upon written approval of the Architect. Contract #168-03 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 5 C. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. G. Each coat of paint applied shall be inspected by the Architect before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats. Provide the Architect with a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. The Architect reserves the right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to final coat. H. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet file (MWF) thickness specified in Schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Additional coats shall be applied if required to produce full coverage. 3.05 CLEANING, PATCHING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions. B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. C. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings proved by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. E. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those listed below. B. Exterior Exposed Ferrous Metal: 1. Primer Coat: To be applied in the shop or field. a. Description: Fast curing, VOC compliant zinc -rich primer. b. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP6 according to manufacturer's product data sheet. c. Color: Standard reddish gray. d. Finish: Flat. e. Solids Content: 63 % solids by volume. Contract #168-03 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 6 f. Zinc Content: 83 % zinc in the dried film. g. Application Rate: One coat @ 3.0-4.0 mils dry film thickness. h. Acceptable Product: Tnemec Series 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc. 2. Intermediate Coat: To be applied in the field. a. Description: High -build polyamide epoxy. b. Surface Preparation: clean and dry according to manufacturer's data sheet. c. Color: As selected by Architect. d. Finish: Semi -gloss e. Solids Content: 56 % solids by volume. f. Application rate: One coat Q 4.0-6.0 dry mils.. g. Acceptable Product: Tnemec Series 66 HE Epoxoine. 3. Finish Coat: To be applied in the shop or field. a. Description: High -solids high-performance, fast drying aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating. b. Surface Preparation: clean and dry according to manufacturer's data sheet. c. Color: As selected by Architect. d. Finish: Semi -gloss e. Solids Content: 72% solids by volume. f. Application rate: One coat Q 3.5-4.5 mils dry film thickness. g. Surface burning: Conform to NFPA 101 Class A requirement for flame spread and smoke density. h. Acceptable Products: Tnemel Series 75 Endurashield C. Interior and Exterior Metal: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-208 Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Primer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide Gloss Enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide Gloss Enamel D. Galvanized Metal: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-209 Galvanized Steel Primer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide Gloss Enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide Gloss Enamel End of Section Contract #168-03 FRP WALL PANELS - Section 09.970 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of FRP Wall Panels is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Provide panel system complete with all moldings, materials and accessories for a complete and satisfactory installation. C. Wall panes shall be installed over cement board substrates 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product literature, installation and cleaning instructions. B. Submit two sets of color samples of FRP panels and PVC moldings for selection by the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRP WALL PANELS A. Panels shall be equivalent to Fire-X Glasboard Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) wall panels manufactured by Kemlite. B. Panels shall be Class A flame spread, pebble finish. C. Panels shall cover all wall areas where scheduled. D. Furnish all anchors, moldings and trim pieces required for a complete and satisfactory installation. E. Provide waterproof construction adhesive recommended by the manufacturer. F. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard selections. G. Panel size shall be 4' wide x height indicated on the Drawings. H. Panel thickness shall be 0.09 inches. I. Provide divider molding at all panel joints. J. Provide continuous molding at top and bottom K. All moldings shall be PVC. Contract #168-03 FRP WALL PANELS Section 09.970 Page 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Inspect substrate prior to application of panels. Notify Architect of any unsatisfactory conditions. B. Installation shall constitute acceptance of the substrate. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach panels to gypsum wallboard substrate with adhesives in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Adhesive shall be spread over the entire back of panel using a notched trowel. B. Position panels so that no panel will be less than 24" wide. 3.02 CLEANING A. At completion of installation, clean all panels and remove all debris and miscellaneous materials from the site. End of Section I Contract #168-03 TOILET ACCESSORIES Section 10.800 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on the Drawings and scheduled herein. B. The type of toilet accessories required includes the following: 1. Paper Towel Dispensers 2. Soap Dispensers 3. Toilet Tissue Dispensers 4. Grab Bars C. Mirrors shall be furnished and installed under the work of section 08.800. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's literature for each product. Mark sufficiently to indicate compliance with these specifications. Indicate locations, methods of supporting, methods of anchoring and finishes of each accessory. 1.04 GENERAL A. Use concealed fastenings. B. Verify type of mounting surfaces; provide proper anchors or fasteners to ensure permanent mounting. C. Provide locks where specified; provide same keying throughout for all accessory units. D. All mounting locations and heights shall meet the State of Texas Program for the Elimination of Architectural Barriers. iRIL EN"I, \;17Wi11Y1 A. Provide a one (1) year warranty from the Date of Substantial Completion for all materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided they comply with these Specifications: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co. 2. Bradley Corporation B. Proprietary references used herein are to serve as guidelines for establishing style, type and quality of accessories to comply with requirements of this project. Other accessories will be considered provided same are, in the opinion of the Architect, equal in weight, finish, size, appearance and dispense same type of goods or services. Contract # 168-03 TOILET ACCESSORIES Section 10.800 Page 2 2.02 MATERIALS } A. Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick #B-2740, surface mounted, multi -roll toilet tissue dispenser. Provide one unit at each water closet. P B. Soap Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick #B4112 Contura Series, surface mounted soap dispenser for liquid soap. Provide 1 unit at each toilet room lavatory. { C. Paper Towel Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick # 4262 Contura Series, surface mounted paper towel dispenser. Provide one unit as shown on Drawings. D. Grab Bars: Equivalent to Bobrick B 550 (1 1/4" diameter) polished ends, peened gripping surface, concealed mounted with 4 setscrews. Clearance between the grab bar and the wall shall be 1 1/2". Mounting shall be as shown on the Drawings. Furnish in lengths noted on the Drawings. E. All dispensers shall be located for accessibility in strict accordance with ADA and the State of Texas Elimination of Architectural Barriers Program (TAS). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All accessories shall be located for accessibility in accordance with ADA and the State of Texas Elimination of Architectural Barriers Program B. Install accessories according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Install accessories plumb, square, level and true with wall or surfaces. �} IlJ( C. Install grab bars where scheduled to support a minimum load of 300 pounds downward pull. D. Frames of recessed accessories shall neatly trim the opening. Gaps and voids between frames and finished walls will not be allowed. Exposed and concealed fastening shall match finish of fixtures and shall be stainless steel, theft -proof type. E. Install concealed anchor plates to wall construction for mounting all accessories. Provide grounds or rough bucks to rigidly secure accessories. F. All controls, dispensers or other operable equipment shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all manufacturer's temporary labels or marks of identification. Clean and polish to remove all oil, - grease and foreign material. Leave accessories in a neat, orderly and clean condition. End of Section Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Agreement, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes a single -story, single -span, rigid -frame -type preengineered metal building of the nominal length, width, eave height, and roof pitch indicated. B. Exterior walls shall be covered with field -assembled insulated wall panels attached to framing members using exposed fasteners. C. Roof system consists of the manufacturer's standard 26 gage "R" panel lap -seam insulated roof. Attach 3" of insulation with bands. Manufacturer's standard building components and accessories may be used, provided components, accessories, and complete structure conform to design indicated and specified requirements. D. I The work of this section includes the complete engineering, fabrication and erection of the Metal Building System, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Structural frame, foundation anchor bolts, subpurlins and bracing. 2. Prefinished exterior wall panels with insulation. 3. Prefinished roofing panels with insulation. 4. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames (Finish hardware furnished under Section 08.700). 5. Sectional overhead door. 6. Aluminum windows. 7. Structural concrete foundation and slab. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Concrete floor and foundations and installation of anchor bolts are specified in Division 3 Section "Concrete Work." B. Sealants and caulking for interior finish -out are specified in Section 07.900. C. Finish hardware and provisions for masterkeying are specified in Section 08.700 "Finish Hardware." D. Painting is specified in Section 09.900. E. Mechanical work is specified in Division 15. F. Electrical work is specified in Division 15. Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS i Section 13.122 Page 2 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Engineer, design, fabricate and erect the structural concrete foundation and the pre-engineered metal building system to withstand loads from winds, gravity, structural movement including movement thermally induced, and to resist in-service use conditions that the building will experience, including exposure to the weather, without failure. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "Design Practices Manual." B. Structural design for the preengineered metal building shall be by a Professional Engineer registered in Texas, employed by the manufacturer. All shop and erection drawings for the preengineered metal building for this project shall bear the Professional Engineer's seal and signature. C. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary and collateral loads, are as follows: 1. Basic design loads include live load, wind load, and seismic load, in addition to the dead load. 2. Auxiliary loads include dynamic live loads such as those generated by cranes and material handling equipment. 3. Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and above the weight of the metal building system such as sprinkler systems and roof -mounted mechanical systems. D. Structural Framing and roof and Siding Panels: Design primary and secondary structural members and exterior covering materials for applicable loads and combinations of loads in accordance with the Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA) "Design Practices Manual." r 1. Structural Steel: Comply with the American Institute of Steel Construction's (RISC) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" for design requirements and allowable stresses. 2. Light Gage Steel: Comply with the American Iron and Steel Institute's (AISC) "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and "Design of Light Gage Steel Diaphragms" for design requirements and allowable stresses. 3. Welded Connections: Comply with the American Welding Society's (AWS) "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" for welding procedures. E. The Metal Building shall be designed to meet or exceed the criteria for80fph wind speed, exposure C as specified in the 1997 Uniform Building Code. F. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 4ee�-Section 08:1=50'Hollow Metal Doors and Frames for requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data consisting of metal building system manufacturer's product information for building components and accessories. B. Submit shop drawings for structural concrete foundation and metal building structural framing system, roofing and siding panels, and other metal building system components and accessories that are not fully detailed or Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 3 dimensioned in manufacturer's product data. 1. Structural Framing: Furnish complete erection drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Include details showing fabrication and assembly of the metal building system. Show anchor bolts settings and sidewall, endwall, and roof framing. Include transverse cross -sections. 2. Roofing and Siding Panels: Provide layouts of panels on walls and roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, comers, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Include transverse cross -sections. Include skylight panels. 3. Building Accessory Components: Provide details of metal building accessory components to clearly indicate methods of installation including the following: 4. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale. Provide details of ventilators, louvers, gutters, downspouts, and other sheet metal accessories at not less than 1-1/2-inch scale showing profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages. 5. Submit two (2) copies of manufacturer's color charts or chips showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for metal roofmg and siding panels with factory -applied finishes. 6. Samples for verification purposes of roofing and siding panels. Provide sample panels 12-inch long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories. 7. Submit two (2) copies of Installer certificates signed by metal building Contractor written certification certifying that the Installer complies with requirements included under the "Quality Assurance" Article. 8. Submit two (2) copies of professional engineer's certificate prepared and signed by a professional engineer, legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located, verifying that the foundation, structural framing and covering panels meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction. Include a listing of design loads, load combinations and any other criteria upon which the design was based. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage an experienced Installer to erect the preengineered metal building who has specialized in the erection and installation of types of metal buildings systems similar to that required for this project and who is certified in writing by the metal building Contractor as qualified for erection of the manufacturer's products. B. Provide preengineered metal buildings manufactured by a firm experienced in manufacturing metal buildings systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Obtain the metal building system components, including structural framing, wall and roof covering, and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer. D. The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the preengineered metal building system. Metal building systems having equal performance characteristics with deviations from indicated dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept or intended Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 4 performance. The burden of proof for equality is on the proposer. E. The Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the preengineered metal buildings and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Metal building systems having equal characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.07 DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage. B. Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. A. Furnish the roofmg and siding panel manufacturer's written warranty, covering failure of the factory -applied exterior finish on metal wall and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. B. Warranty period for factory -applied exterior finishes on wall and roof panels shall be 20 years beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. C. The Metal Building System and accessories shall be warranted for a one year period beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish at least 5 percent excess over required amount of nuts, bolts, screws, washers, and other required fasteners for each metal building. Pack in cartons labeled to identify the contents and store on the site where directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal building systems that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: A & M Building Systems, Inc. A & S Building Systems, Inc. American Buildings Co. American Steel Building Co., Inc. Armco Steelox Building Systems Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 5 Atlantic Building Systems Behlen Manufacturing Co. Bigbee Steel Buildings, Inc. Butler Manufacturing Co. Ceco Buildings Division Chief Industries, Inc. Dean Steel Buildings, Inc. Garco Building Systems Gulf States Manufacturers, Inc. Kirby Building Systems, Inc. Metal Building Components, Inc. Mesco Metal Building Corp. Metalic Building Systems Package Steel Buildings Corp. Pascoe Building Systems Southern Structures, Inc. Space Master Buildings Star Buildings Division, H.H. Robertson Co. United Structures of America Varco-Pruden Buildings Whirlwind Steel Buildings, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Structural Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A 36 or A 529. B. Steel Tubing or Pipe: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, ASTM A 501, or ASTM A 53. C. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: Provide 42,000 psi minimum yield strength. Comply with ASTM A 529, ASTM A 570, or ASTM A 572. D. Steel Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: Comply with ASTM A 607, Grade 50. E. Cold -Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 366 or ASTM A 568. F. Hot -Rolled Cabron Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 568 or ASTM A 569. G. Structural Quality Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 446 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525. Grade to suit manufacturer's standards. H. Aluminum -Coated Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 463 with Tl-40 coating. I. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 for Alclad alloy 3003 or 3004 with temper as required to suit forming operations. J. Bolts for Structural Framing: Comply with ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 as necessary for design loads and connection details. K. Thermal Insulation: Glass fiber blanket insulation, complying with ASTM C 991, of 0.6 lb. per cu. ft. density, 3" thick, with UL flame spread classification of 25 or less, and 2 inch wide continuous vapor -tight Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 6 edge tabs. L. Fiberglass insulation facings shall be laminated on one side with vinyl film facing. M. Sealant shall be equivalent to Vulkem 116 polyurethane sealant as manufactured by Mameco. N. Paint and Coating Materials shall comply with performance requirements of the federal specifications indicated. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, compliance with compositional requirements of federal specifications indicated is not required. O. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal shall be fast -curing, lead-free, universal primer, selected by the manufacturer for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Comply with FS TT-P-645 P. Shop Primer for Galvanized Metal Surfaces shall be zinc dust -zinc oxide primer selected by the manufacturer for compatibility with substrate. Comply with FS TT-P641. 2.03 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Rigid Frames: Fabricate from structural steel shapes or plates. Provide factory -welded, shop -painted frames consisting of tapered or parallel flange beams and parallel flange columns. Furnish frames with attachment plates, bearing plates and splice members. Factory drill for field -bolted assembly. 1. Provide length of span and spacing of frames indicated. Slight variations in length of span and frame spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard. B. Provide bearing frames at endwalls where indicated. C. Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary framing members: 1. Roof Purlins, Sidewall and Endwall Girts: "C" or "Z" shaped sections fabricated from shop painted roll formed steel. Purlin braces shall be fabricated from shop painted cold -formed steel sections. 2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange "C" shaped sections formed to provide adequate backup for both wall and roof panels. Fabricate from shop painted roll formed steel. 3. Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 inch angles fabricated from shop painted roll formed steel. 4. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) shop painted cold -formed steel sections. 5. Secondary endwall structural members, except columns and beams, shall be the manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold -formed galvanized steel. D. Wind Bracing: As engineered by manufacturer. Sidewall wind posts located in comers are acceptable unless noted otherwise. E. Bolts: Provide shop -painted bolts except when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. Provide zinc -plated or cadmium -plated bolts when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. Contract #168-03 METAL BUELDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 7 F. Shop Painting: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7 for brush-off blast cleaning, and SSPC-SP1 for solvent cleaning. 1. Prime structural steel primary and secondary framing members with the manufacturer's standard rust - inhibitive primer. 2. Prime galvanized members, after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with manufacturer's standard zinc dust -zinc oxide primer. 2.04 ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS A. Face Sheets: Fabricate "R" panel wall face sheets from 26-gage (0.0179-inch) steel, structural quality, Grade C, factory -painted steel sheets. Color shall be selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard selections. B. Roof Panels: Form panels of 26 gage "R" panels, factory -painted steel sheets. 1. Clips: Provide panel clips. 2. Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. a. Provide metal -backed rubber washers under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of panels. b. Use stainless steel fasteners for exterior application and galvanized or cadmium -plated fasteners for interior applications. c. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of rubber washer. d. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofing or siding sheets by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. 3. Accessories: Provide the following sheet metal accessories factory -formed of the same material in the same finish as roof and wall panels: a. Flashings. b. Closers. c. Fillers. d. Metal expansion joints. e. Ridge covers. f. Fascias. 4. Flexible Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded cellular rubber, self -extinguishing flexible closure strips. Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 8 Cut or premold to match configuration of roofing and siding sheets. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 5. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive 100 percent solids grey polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 6. Joint Sealant: One -part elastomeric polyurethane sealant as recommended by the building manufacturer. 7. Baked Enamel Finish: Provide the manufacturer's standard shop -applied baked enamel finish to galvanized steel roof and wall panels, and related trim and accessory elements. For roofing and siding, apply finish coat on exterior facings and manufacturer's standard wash coat on reverse face. a. Clean galvanized steel with an alkaline compound, then treat with a zinc phosphate conversion coating, and seal with a chromic acid rinse. b. Apply baked -on thereto -setting modified acrylic enamel to pretreated steel sheets, in one or more coats as standard with the manufacturer to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. c. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. 8. Skylight panels shall be equivalent to Light Transmittg `"R" panels"manufactured by MBCI. Furnish in quantities and sizes as indicated on the Drawings. 2.05 PERSONNEL DOORS A. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames by building supplier, meeting the requirements of Section 08.150 Finish hardware shall not be furnished under this section. 2.06 SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide coated steel sheet metal accessories with coated steel roofing and siding panels. B. Gutters: Form complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Size in accordance with SMACNA. Join sections with riveted and sealed joints. Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches on center. Finish to match roof fascia and rake. C. Downspouts: Form complete with elbows and offsets. Join sections with 1-1/2 inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; Iocate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 5 feet on center in between. Finish to match wall panels. 2.07 FABRICATION A. General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and disassembly. 1. Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may be disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled with a minimum amount of labor. 2. Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 9 erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. B. Structural Framing: Shop -fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with base plates, bearing plates, and other plates required for erection, welded in place. Provide holes for anchoring or connections shop -drilled or punched to template dimensions. 1. Shop Connections: Provide power riveted, bolted, or welded shop connections. 2. Field Connections: Provide bolted field connections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level base plates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double -nutted anchor bolts. B. Purlins and Girts: Provide rake or gable purlins with tight -fitting closure channels and fascias. Locate and space wall girts and suit door and window arrangements and heights. Secure purlins and girts to structural framing and hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods. C. Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in roof and sidewalls as indicated. 1. Moment -resisting frames may be used in lieu of sidewall rod bracing, to meet manufacturer's standards. 2. Where diaphragm strength of roof or wall covering is adequate to resist wind forces, rod or angle bracing will not be required. D. Framed Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame. 3.02 ROOFING AND SIDING A. General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. Protect factory finishes from damage. 1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, closures to exclude weather. B. Roof Panel System: Fasten roof panels to purlins with fasteners in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install clips at each support with self -drilling fasteners. 2. At end laps of panels, install tape caulk between panels. Contract #168-03 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 10 3. Use rubber jacks at all roof penetrations, Dek-Tite or equal. C. Wall Sheets: Apply polyurethane sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete and elsewhere as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and apply sealant and backup in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten panels with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. Fasten window and door frames with machine screws or bolts. When building height requires two rows of panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over wall panels at eave height. 2. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress rubber washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 3. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. D. Skylight Panels: Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Furnish and install tape sealer, fasteners and all other accessories required for a complete and watertight installation. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Install gutters, downspouts, ventilators, louvers, and other sheet metal accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise operation. F. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Shall meet the minimum requirements of Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. Install doors and frames straight, plumb, and level. Securely anchor frames to building structure. Set units with 1/8-inch maximum clearance between door and frame at jambs and head and 1/2-inch maximum between door and floor. Adjust hardware for proper operation. G. Overhead Sectional Doors: Set doors and operating equipment with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust moving hardware for proper operation. H. Thermal Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with installation of roof panels in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor barrier. Locate insulation on underside of roof sheets, extending across the top flange of purlin members and held taut and snug to roofing panels. I. Cleaning and Touch -Up: Clean component surfaces of matter that could preclude paint bond. Touch up abrasions, marks, skips, or other defects to shop -primed surfaces with same type material as shop primer End of Section ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/13/2003 SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The contractor shall provide complete and operational systems at the completion of the contract. The contractor shall provide all labor and materials required to comply with the intent of these documents, locat codes and ordinances, whether specifically indicated or not. B. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specification for the general construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P", or "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the Specifications. C. Order of Precedence shall be observed in laying out pipe, ductwork, material and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panel boards, etc. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewer and storm drain lines. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. D. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material or equipment. 1.3 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "provide", "furnish and install" or other similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this division of the specification, complete for operation unless specifically noted otherwise. B. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition of the contract. C. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. D. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1.4 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS WIRING B. Low voltage temperature control wiring shall be installed under the Division 15 Contract. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit information for individual sections as indicated in the following schedule. 11/13/2003 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 2 �m�mCwXC:pCO �n � � ��zaZ c� r0 ��--��.-�--�.-:max-- tAr.—C �> z '� v' o=ov�000bzo ��C)C�7d o t� z o z� z� c� construction photos construction delegated Design manufacturers instructions Material safety data sheets Wiring diagrams Insurance certificates < < Installer certificates Manufacturer certificates Material certificates Product certificates Welding certificates Design Data < < < Maintenance Data t < < < < < t < Product Data Qualification Data Coordination drawings Shop drawings Compatibility test reports Evaluation reports Field test reports Product test reports preconstruction test reports Material test reports Research reports Product schedule Samples Samples for initial selection Samples for review Samples for color review Samples for kind review Samples for pattern review Samples for texture review Samples for verification ri I - 15530o•••:::::l�ii� :::::ilGiiiiiiiiiiii FURNACES 15542 - FUEL� FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 15550- BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, ANDSTACKS 15738 - SPLIT - SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONIN G UNITS METAL DUCTS-- 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES ....... ... ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/13/2003 1.6 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of Work. B. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. Owner will handle and store products. C. For portions of Project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial Completion, deliver a proportional part of spare products to Owner; obtain receipt. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 5 ' ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Escutcheons. 3. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 4. Painting and fmishing. 5. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11/4/2003 A. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 M ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. 2.5 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One -Piece, Stamped -Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome -plated finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Chrome -Plated Piping: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped -steel type with spring clips. C. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece , cast -brass type with polished chrome plated finish. M. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. N. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4 rt' ~' ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 131.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 PAINTING A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. 3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocldng, and anchorages to support, and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 6 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Thermal -hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe positioning systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts " for duct hangers and supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal -hanger shield inserts. 3. Pipe positioning systems. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 -1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11/4/2003 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory -fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 3. Empire Industries, Inc. 4. ER1CO/Michigan Hanger Co. 5. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 6. Grinnell Corp. 7. GS Metals Corp. 8. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Power -Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.4 THERMAL -HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive -strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 2 P' ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation -Insert Material for Cold Piping: with vapor barrier. D. Insulation -Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type Il cellular glass. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. C. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners. B. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened pordand cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. C. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2.6 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS 11/4/2003 A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications. B. Manufacturers: 1. C & S Mfg. Corp. 2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. 3. Samco Stamping, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. F. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. G. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Malleable -Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Top Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 4 J I t ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. K. Comply with WNIA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. L. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. ` B. Thermal -Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. C. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures. D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. G. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME 1331.9 for building services piping. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 3.3 11/4/2003 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight - distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous -thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.4 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 6 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS SECTION 15081 -DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS 11/4/2003 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, ; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke -developed rating of 50 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. DUCT INSULATION 15081 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1.6 COORDINATION 11/4/2003 A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type 11, without facing and with all -service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. 2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Adhesive -Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface. B. Self -Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. DUCT INSULATION 15081 - 2 ' ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each duct system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. E. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. F. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. G. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. H. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 3. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. I. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. CDUCT INSULATION 15081 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 J. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions. 3.4 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers. 5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure -sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. 7. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 8. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.5 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems: 1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside -air ductwork. DUCT INSULATION 15081 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Factory -insulated flexible ducts. 2. Flexible connectors. 3.6 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Round, supply -air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral -fiber blanket 1.0 PCF, Installed insulation value R=6.0 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: No. B. Service: Round, return -air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral -fiber blanket 1.0 PCF, Installed insulation value R=6.0 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: No. C. Service: Rectangular, supply -air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral -fiber blanket 1.0 PCF, Installed insulation value R=6.0. 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: No. D. Service: Rectangular, return -air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral -fiber blanket 1.0 PCF, Installed insulation value R=6.0 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: No. E. Service: Rectangular, outside -air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral -fiber blanket 1.0 PCF, Installed insulation value R=6.0 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: No. END OF SECTION 15081 i DUCT INSULATION 15081 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS SECTION 15083 -PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 11/4/2003 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field - applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums. 2. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. ,., 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE pp ' A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke -developed rating of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. �3 PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. 3. Polyolefin Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. IMCOA. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory -applied, all- purpose, vapor -retarder jacket. 2. Fire -Resistant Adhesive: Comply with M1L-A-3316C in the following classes and grades: a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass -fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass -fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass -fiber. insulation. b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass -fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 3. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 4. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 2 f._ I ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type H for sheet materials. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet -Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Polyolefin Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, except for density. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs. E. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 I. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor - retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties. J. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. K. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder L. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors. 3.4 M INERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. For insulation with factory -applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. B. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass -fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands. 3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. C. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass -fiber blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation. 3. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor -retarder mastic. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 4 [i ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 4. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. 3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. B. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: 1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. 3.6 POLYOLEFIN INSULATION APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. For split tubes, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. For self-adhesive insulation, staple longitudinal seams after sealing. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. B. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: 1. Apply mitered sections of polyolefm pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. C. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply cut segments of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket. 3. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. 3.7 FINISHES A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Below -grade piping, unless otherwise indicated. ' 3. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field quality -control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications. C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications. 3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field -applied jackets. B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements. 3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water. 1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber, Polyolefn. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Copper Pipe, 1/2" to 2 `/2": 1" 4. Field -Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 6 IN ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Service: Domestic chilled water. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber, Polyolefm. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Copper Pipe, All Sizesl/2" 4. Field -Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None. C. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the disabled. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 120 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: 1/2" 4. Field -Applied Jacket: PVC P-trap and supply covers. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None. END OF SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 7 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15110 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general -duty valves: 1. Copper -alloy ball valves. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves: 1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2.. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 5. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves andASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold -water piping valves unless referenced. B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASMEB16.10 and ASMEB16.34 for dimension and design criteria. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. VALVES 15110 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew -point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.. 2.2 VALVES, GENERAL A.` Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves. B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. C. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. D. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. E. Valve Actuators: 1. Lever Handle: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves. 2. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug head. F. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. VALVES 15110 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.3 COPPER -ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. One -Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. DynaQuip Controls. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Jamesbury, Inc. h. Kitz Corporation of America. i. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. j. NI13COINC. k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Copper -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP=110. C. One -Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome -plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats, and 400-psig minimum CWP rating. 2.4 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Lubricated -Type, Cast -Iron Plug Valves: a. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. b. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. C. Olson Technologies; Homestead Div. d. R & M Energy Systems (Tomball, TX). e. Walworth Co. 2. Nonlubricated-Type, Cast -Iron Plug Valves: a. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. b. Grinnell Corporation. C. Mueller Flow Technologies. d. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls. e. Wheatley Gaso, Inc. f. Xomox Corporation. B. Cast -Iron Plug Valves, General: MSS SP-78. C. Class 125 or 150, lubricated -type, cast-iron plug valves. D. Class 125 or 150, nonlubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves. 15110 - 3 VALVES ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball] valves. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One -piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. D. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with threaded ends for heating hot water, steam, and steam condensate services. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. VALVES 15110 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead -free - alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 15110 VALVES 15110 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with 80 psig , unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 61, 'Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 -1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought - copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASMEB 16.22, wrought - copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. 2.4 VALVES A. Bronze and cast-iron, general -duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section 'Earthwork." 3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Under -Building -Slab, Water -Service Piping Under -Building -Slab, Domestic Water Piping From Well: Soft copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. C. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 2 [ -i ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures rz' that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop -and -waste drain valves where indicated. 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Install under -building -slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Install domestic water piping level and plumb. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead -free - alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions: 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water -service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water -service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold -water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. aJ DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 5. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. END OF SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 6 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile butadiene-styrene plastic. B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. B. Field quality -control inspection and test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF -drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF -tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF -sewer" for plastic sewer piping. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. .In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder joint fittings. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 2.4 ABS PIPE AND FrI"T1NGS A. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. 2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 2 Section 'Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 2 _y ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. B. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 2. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. C. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. D. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short -sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignnnent indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. F. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. G. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661. H. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665. I. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321. J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 4 t ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches. 11/4/2003 G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3. Roughing -in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent - stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water based latex paint. END OF SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 6 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS SECTION 15194 - FUEL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 11 /4/2003 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fuel gas piping within the building. Products include the following: 1. Pipe, tube, fittings, and joining materials. 2. Protective pipe and fitting coating. 3. Piping specialties. 4. Specialty valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig or less . B. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows: 1. Nominal Heating Value: 2500 Btu/cu. ft. . 2. Nominal Specific Gravity: 1.59. 1.4 SUBMITTALS . A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Corrugated, stainless -steel tubing systems. Include associated components. 2. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code." FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11/4/2003 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M; Type E or S; Grade B; black. Wall thickness of wrought -steel pipe shall comply with ASME B36.1OM. 1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASMEB1.20.1. 3. Unions: ASME B 16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 4. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy. 2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B 1.20.1 for pipe threads. B. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and CSA International listed. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Valve Inc. b. B&K Industries, Inc. C. Brass Craft Manufacturing Co. d. Cimberio Valves, S. p. A. FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 e. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. f. E. M. Plastic and Electric Products, Ltd.; Neo Valve Div. g. JMF Company. h. Jomar International Ltd. i. Key Gas Components, Inc. j. Legend Valve and Fitting, Inc. k. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 1. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div. In. Newman Hattersley Ltd.; Specialty Valves Div. n. Robert Manufacturing Co. o. State Metals, Inc. p. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. C. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type with chrome -plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless -steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum pressure rating. 2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Description: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosion - resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent. 1. Manufacturers: a. Line Pressure Regulators: 1) American Meter Company. 2) Donkin, Bryan RMG Canada, Ltd. 3) Eclipse Combustion, Inc. 4) Fisher Controls International, Inc.; Division of Emerson. 5) Invensys. 6) Maxitrol Company. 7) National Meter Industries, Inc. 8) Richards Industries, Inc.; Jordan Valve Div. 9) Schlumberger Limited; Gas Div. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B 1.20.1 for pipe threads. 3. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 2 psig- minimum inlet pressure rating. B. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field -installed, corrosion -resistant screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Examine roughing -in for fuel oil piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section. 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Fuel Gas Piping, 2 psig or Less: 1. NPS 3/4 and NPS l: Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve. B. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap. 1. Above -Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings. 2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls. a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls. 3. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 - 4 [I" ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum -length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. D. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. E. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. F. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. G. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. H. Install corrugated, stainless -steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move. I. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve. 3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hanger and support and equipment support materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. ,.: 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve. , L F FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance using gas. E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 1. Do not use gas pipe as grounding electrode. F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.9 PAINTING A. Use materials and procedures in Division 9 painting Sections. B. Paint exterior service meters, pressure regulators, and specialty valves. 1. Color: Gray. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test, inspect, and purge piping according to NFPA 54 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. C. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and specialties. D. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators. E. Verify that specified piping tests are complete. END OF SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 - 6 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15410 -PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section 'Emergency Plumbing Fixtures." 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and specialty fixtures not in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general -duty valves are included where indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow -control rates for each type of fixture indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. C. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. PLUMBING FIXTURES . 15410 -1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11 /4/2003 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC Al 17.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Texas Department of Regulation (TDLR) Texas Accessibility Standards. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494- 187" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System _Components --Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. G. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Hand Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 2. Vitreous -China Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.2M. 3. Water -Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037. I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory faucets: 1. Faucets: ASMEA112.18.1M. 2. NSF Materials: NSF 61. 3. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1. 4. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME Al 12.18.1M. J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M. 2. Manual -Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 3. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME Al 12.18.1M. K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Off -Floor Fixture Supports: ASME Al 12.6.1M. 2. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1. 3. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 4. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC Al 17.1. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1.6 COORDINATION 11/4/2003 A. Coordinate roughing -in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Products," and "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers and their products or manufacturers only, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in other Part 2 articles. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 LAVATORY FAUCETS A. Lavatory Faucet,: Include hot- and cold -water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor. 1. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body Material: Copper or brass underbody with brass cover plate. 3. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 4. Type: Single -control mixing. 5. Centers: 4 inches. 6. Mounting: Deck, concealed. 7. Handle(s): Lever. 8. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing, plain end. 9. Spout: Rigid. 10. Spout Outlet: Spray, 0.5 gpm. 11. Operation: Noncompression, manual. 12. Drain: Grid. 13. Tempering Device: Not required. 2.3 TOILET SEATS A. Toilet Seat,: Solid plastic. 1. Configuration: Open front without cover. 2. Size: Elongated. 3. Class: Standard commercial. 4. Hinge Type: SS, self-sustaining. 5. Color: White. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.4 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Guard,: Manufactured, plastic covering for hot- and cold -water supplies and trap and drain piping and complying with ADA requirements. B. Protective Shielding Guard,: Manufactured, plastic enclosure for covering for hot- and Cold- water supplies and trap and drain piping and complying with ADA requirements. 2.5 FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Water -Closet Support,: Water -closet combination carrier designed for accessible mounting height. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub -and -spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space. B. Lavatory Support,: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod. Include steel uprights with feet. 2.6 WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets,: Accessible, floor -mounting, floor -outlet, vitreous -china fixture designed for gravity -type tank operation. 1. Products: a. American Standard, Inc.;. b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products;. C. Kohler Co.;. d. U.S. Industries, Eljer Plumbingware Div.;. 2. Style: Close coupled. a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. b. Height: Accessible. C. Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush. d. Tank: Gravity type with trim. Include cover. e. Trip Mechanism: Lever -handle actuator. f. Color: White. 3. Supply: NPS 3/8 chrome -plated brass or copper with wheel -handle stop. 4. Toilet Seat: 2.7 LAVATORIES A. Lavatories,: Accessible, wall -hanging, vitreous -china fixture. 1. Products: a. Kohler Co.;. b. U.S. Industries, Eljer Plumbingware Div.;. C. American Standard, Inc.;. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 d. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products;. e. Kohler Co.;. f. U.S. Industries, Eljer Plumbingware Div.;. 2. Type: Ledge back. 3. Size: 20 by 18 inches rectangular. 4. Faucet Hole Punching: Three, 4-inch centers, hole[s]. 5. Faucet Hole Location: Top. 6. Color: White. 7. Faucet: Lavatory for separate drain. 8. Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome -plated copper with stops. 9. Drain: Grid. 10. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 chrome -plated cast -brass trap;, 0.032-inch- thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. 11. Protective Shielding Guard: 12. Fixture Support: Lavatory PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing -in data if roughing -in data are not indicated. B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. i B. For wall -hanging fixtures, install off -floor supports affixed to building substrate. 1. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 2. Use chair -type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures. C. Install floor -mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate. D. Install wall -hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports. E. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing -in drawings. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 F. Install water -supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty valves. G. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system. H. Install tanks for accessible, tank -type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment. I. Install toilet seats on water closets. J. Install faucet -spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. K. Install water -supply, flow -control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. L. Install faucet, flow -control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. M. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. N. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons. O. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary -type, one -part, mildew -resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures. C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping. D. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to plumbing piping. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 6 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 E. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing piping. F. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets, to produce proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 7 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 8 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Wheel -handle wall hydrants. 3. Drain valves. 4. Flashing materials. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Floor drains. 7. Oil interceptors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and pressure gages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PUR: Polyurethane plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working -pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig. 2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 -1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1.5 SUBMITTALS 11/4/2003 A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following: 1. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems. 2. Drain valves, hose bibbs, hydrants, and hose stations. 3. Cleanouts, floor drains, and open receptors. 4. Roof flashing assemblies. 5. Oil interceptors. B. Field test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," for piping materials and installation. E. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF pw" on plastic potable -water piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and d vent piping. 2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components --Health Effects, Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers. 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. Interior Components: Corrosion -resistant materials. 3. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome -plated piping system. 4. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated. B. Hose -Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden -hose threads on outlet. Units attached to rough -bronze -finish hose connections may be rough bronze. 2.3 WHEEL -HANDLE WALL HYDRANTS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. 2. B & K Industries, Inc. 3. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. 4. NIBCO INC. 5. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 7. Woodford Manufacturing Co. 8. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div. B. Description: Frost -proof design similar to ASME Al 12.21.3M, for wall mounting with wheel - handle operation, NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint inlet, casing and operating rod to match wall thickness, and projecting outlet with ASME B 1.20.7 garden -hose threads on outlet. Include wall clamp; integral vacuum breaker or nonremovable, drainable hose -connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011; and garden -hose threads complying with ASME B 1.20.7 on outlet. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 2O1, metal -bellows type with pressurized metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 2O1, Sizes A through F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Josam Co. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. C. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation. B. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, piston type with pressurized metal -tube cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 2O1, Sizes A through F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Josam Co. C. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. 2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04- inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill- phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. B. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness. C. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. D. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. D. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping. E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than f- inch total depression. 3. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. F. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow -control fitting, according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. 1. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with finished floor. 2. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on outlet. G. Fasten wall -hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated. A. Fasten recessed -type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls. I. Install wood-blocldng reinforcement for wall -mounting and recessed -type plumbing specialties. J. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves. K. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 9 L. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections. D. Ground equipment. E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. B. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. C. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 6 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following electric water heaters: 1. Household, storage electric water heaters. 2. Water heater accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, famished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Source quality -control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of electric water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water. ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion: a. Household Electric Water Heaters: 1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Two years. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 HOUSEHOLD ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Household, Small -Capacity Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 174. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lochinvar Corporation. b. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. C. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company. e. State Industries, Inc. 2. Storage -Tank Construction: Corrosion -resistant metal. a. Tappings: ASME B 1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. C. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings. ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2.3 3. Factory -Installed Storage -Tank Appurtenances: 11/4/2003 a. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, if tank has drain outlet. Provide hose -end drain valve in piping for water heaters without drain outlet. Hose -end drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties." b. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAEAESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2. C. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. d. Heating Element:. Electric, screw -in immersion type. e. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. f. Safety Control: High -temperature -limit cutoff device or system. g. Power Supply Cord: 24 to 72 inches with plug. h. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 for combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working -pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank. WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working -pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank. B. Drain Pans: Corrosion -resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4. C. Piping -Type Heat Traps: Field -fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Prepare test reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. B. Install water -heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose -end drain valves. C. Fill water heaters with water. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters. C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 15485 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS SECTION 15530 -FURNACES PART 1 - GENERAL 11/4/2003 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Furnaces and accessories complete with controls. 2. Direct -expansion cooling coils with refrigerant piping. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Split -System Air Condensing Units" for condensing units used with cooling coils provided in furnaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Noncondensing Furnace: Furnace with annual fuel utilization efficiency rating ranging from 78 to 85 percent; designed to vent dry flue gas. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each furnace. Include rated capacities of selected models; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. Include plan and elevation views of units, minimum clearances, and data on ratings and capacities. B. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section " Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Furnaces and accessories complete with controls. 2. Direct -expansion cooling coils with refrigerant piping. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. FURNACES 15530 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period: l . Furnace heat exchanger. 2. Control circuit board. B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish two complete sets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 GAS -FIRED FURNACES, NONCONDENSING A. Available Manufacturer 1. American Standard Heating & Air Conditioning. 2. Carrier; Div. of United Technologies Corp. 3. Lennox Industries, Inc. FURNACES 15530 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 4. Trane Company (The). 5. WeatherKing Air Conditioning. 6. York International Corp.; Unitary Products Group. B. Description: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47, "Gas - Fired Central Furnaces," and NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code"; and bearing label of American Gas Association. C. Cabinet: Steel, with interior insulation around heat exchanger. Lift -out panels expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. 1. Interior Insulation: Mineral -fiber board thermal insulation manufactured with glass fibers a minimum of 1/2 inch thick, bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, with aluminum foil jacket. D. Finish of External Casings and Cabinets: Factory painted, manufacturer's standard color. E. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive. 1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. F. Type of Gas: Propane. G. Gravity Combustion Chamber: Draft diverter. H. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel. I. Burner: Atmospheric type. 1. Gas Valve: 24 V, 100 percent safety gas shutoff, pressure regulator, safety pilot, manual set (on -off), pilot filtration, and automatic electric valve. 2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot surface igniter. J. Gas Burner Safety Controls: 1. Thermocouple Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. 3. Vent Safety Shutoff Sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood; de -energizes burner on excessive vent temperature; manual reset. 4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de -energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset. K. Venting and Combustion Air: Power venting, using integral centrifugal fan, and sheet metal duct to factory -fabricated fitting for combustion -air intake and vent. Use only fitting approved by manufacturer for use with furnace. 2.3 CONTROLS A. Furnace Controls: Include components required for satisfactory operation of furnaces and auxiliary, equipment in all seasons. FURNACES 15530 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Control Transformer: 24-V ac output, factory installed, and wired in furnace. C. Cooling Relay: To start condensing unit. D. Blower Fan Control: Fan on -automatic. E. Thermostat: 24-V ac, solid-state, programmable, microprocessor -based wall -mounting unit with automatic switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, multiple temperature presets selectable by day and time, and battery backup protection of program settings against power failure. 2.4 AIR FILTERS AND CLEANERS A. Filters: 1-inch- thick, disposable, fiberglass type in sheet metal frame. 2.5 COOLING FEATURES A. Evaporator Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Comply with ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment." Match size with furnace. Match remote condensing unit specified in Division 15 Section "Condensing Units" with type, capacity, pressure -drop ratings, restricted distributor, or expansion valve. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet. B. Evaporator Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace and evaporator coil, with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint. C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed -copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized with nitrogen, and sealed. Insulate suction line with minimum 3/8-inch- thick, flexible elastomeric tubular insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I. Flared or sweat ends compatible with coil and condensing unit connections. Standard line lengths 15 feet 25 feet . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FURNACE INSTALLATION A. Install gas -fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54. B. Controls: Install thermostat at mounting height of 60 inches above floor. C.. Control Wiring: Install control wiring as specified in Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media." D. Identify furnaces according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." FURNACES 15530 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate 4 general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect gas piping according to Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping." C. Vent Connection, Noncondensing, Gas -Fired Furnaces: Connect Type B vents to noncondensing furnace vent connection and extend outdoors. Type B vents and their installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." D. Connect ducts according to Division 15 Section " Metal Ducts." E. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. y F. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat -distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency. 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 15530 [i FURNACES 15530 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS SECTION 15542 - FUEL -FIRED RADIANT HEATERS PART .1 - GENERAL 11/4/2003 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gas -fired infrared radiant heaters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel -fired radiant heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuel -fired radiant heaters through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of fuel -fired radiant heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat exchanger of fuel -fired radiant heater that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. FUEL -FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 15542 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11/4/2003 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 TUBULAR INFRARED HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Perfection-Schwank, Inc. 2. Reznor/Thomas & Betts. 3. Roberts -Gordon, Inc. 4. Solaronics, Inc. B. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with ANSI Z83.6, "Gas - Fired Infrared Heaters." 1. AGA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of American Gas Association. 2. Type of Gas: Designed and built to bum 0 propane with characteristics same as those of gas available at Project site. C. Combustion Tubing: Aluminized steel with high -emissivity, high -temperature, corrosion - resistant external finish. D. Tubing Connections: Stainless -steel couplings or flared joints with stainless -steel draw bolts. E. Reflector: Polished aluminum, 97 percent minimum reflectivity, with end caps. Shape to control radiation from tubing for uniform intensity at floor level with 100 percent cutoff above centerline of tubing. Provide for rotating reflector or heater around a horizontal axis for minimum 30-degree tilt from vertical. 1. Include hanger kit. F. Burner Safety Controls: 1. Gas Control Valve: Single -stage, regulated redundant 24-V ac gas valve containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body. 2. Blocked Vent Safety: Differential pressure switch in burner safety circuit to stop burner operation with high discharge or suction pressure. 3. Control Panel Interlock: Stops burner if panel is open. 4. Indicator Lights: Burner -on indicator light. FUEL -FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 15542 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 G. Burner and Emitter Type: Gravity -vented power burner, with the following features: 1. Emitter Tube: Aluminized -steel tubing with sight glass for burner and pilot flame observation. 2. Venting: Concentric vent for combustion air and flue gas with rain cap for both. a. Vent Terminal: Vertical. 3. Burner/Ignition: Stainless -steel burner cup and head with balanced -rotor draft fan and spark ignition with electronic flame supervision. 4. Combustion -Air Connection: Duct connection for combustion air to be drawn directly from outside by burner fan. 2.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. Wires and cables are specified in Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media." B. Thermostat: Single -stage, 24-V ac, wall -mounting type with 50 to 90 deg F operating range and fan on switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for radiant heater piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install radiant heaters level and plumb. B. Install and connect gas -fired radiant heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written installation instructions. C. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using chain hanger kits and building attachments. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. FUEL -FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 15542 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 C. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service. Provide AGA-approved flexible units. D. Connect vents according to Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." E. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections. 1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted. F. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Verify proper motor rotation. 4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. C. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fuel -fired radiant heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15542 FUEL -FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 15542 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15550 - BREECHINGS, CBJMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Listed double -wall vents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Type B and BW vents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations. ATUT0_._UR1 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of venting system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failures caused by expansion and contraction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15550 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 LISTED TYPE B AND BW VENTS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. American Metal Products; MASCO Corporation. 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 3. Metal -Fab, Inc. B. Description: Double -wall metal vents tested according to UL 441 and rated for 480 deg F continuously for Type B, or 550 deg F continuously for Type BW; with neutral or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211 and suitable for certified gas -fired appliances.Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/4-inch airspace. C. Inner Shell: ASTM B 209, Type 1100 aluminum . D. Outer Jacket: Galvanized steel. E. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft -hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent -pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. 1. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude 98 percent of rainfall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation, tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent. B. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading. BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15550 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 15550 BREECHINGS, CHDONEYS, AND STACKS 15550 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15738 - SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes split -system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator -fan and compressor -condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split -system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split - system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split -system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation. 2. Lennox Industries Inc. 3. Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group. 4. York International Corp. 5. Weather King Air Conditioning. 2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR -FAN COMPONENTS A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel. 1. Insulation: Faced, glass -fiber duct liner. 2. . Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated. B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal -expansion valve. 2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR -CONDENSER COMPONENTS A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current -sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 1. Compressor Type: Reciprocating. C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. D. Fan: Aluminum -propeller type, directly connected to motor. SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 1573 8 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal -overload protection. F. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan. 1. Compressor time delay. 2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 3. Liquid -crystal display indicating temperature, set -point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed. 4. Fan -speed selection, including auto setting. 5. Heavy Duty Hail Guard. B. Automatic -reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft -annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory -insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator -fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Install ground -mounting, compressor -condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base. D. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick -connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. I, SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 - 3 _s ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15738 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air -distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single -wall, round spiral -seam ducts and formed fittings. 3. Double -wall, round spiral -seam ducts and formed fittings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct - mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air -moving and - distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling -mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. B. Field quality -control test reports. METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART2-PRODUCTS 11/4/2003 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open -weave fabric strips and mastics. B. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. C. Flanged Joint Mastic: One -part, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. METAL DUCTS 15815 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. 1. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. 2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals,- tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide -on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. C. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Formed -On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. METAL DUCTS 15 815 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.6 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION A. Round, Longitudinal -Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B. Duct Joints: 1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center -beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws. C. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal -seam straight ducts. D. Diverging -Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance. E. Fabricate elbows using die -formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die - formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: 1. Mitered -Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die -formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 3. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static -Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 1/2-inch wg . 2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1/2-inch wg . 3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1/2-inch wg . 3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. METAL DUCTS 15 815 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke -control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. I. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. J. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction." K. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized -steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated. 1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints. B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. 3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. B. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof -test) load. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." METAL DUCTS 15815 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS A. Mark position of dampers and air -directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing. B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards. 2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air -handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return -air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. METAL DUCTS 15815 - 6 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS F. Cleanliness Verification: r 1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 2. Where contaminants are discovered, re -clean and reinspect ducts. END OF SECTION 15815 11/4/2003 METAL DUCTS 15815-7 No Text ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 11/4/2003 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Volume dampers. 2. Turning vanes. 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Flexible ducts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Volume dampers. 2. Turning vanes. 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Flexible ducts. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS 11/4/2003 A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. METALAIRE, Inc. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Ruskin Company. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, parallel- or opposed -blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat -shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll -Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. 6. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. D. Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe -bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple -damper assemblies. 1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple -damper assembly. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 E. Damper Hardware: Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.4 TURNING VANES A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, single -vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. C. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc. 2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc. 5. B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11 /4/2003 3. McGill AirFlow Corporation. B. Insulated -Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH 116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff. E. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. F. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. G. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. END OF SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceiling -mounting ventilators. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. POWER VENTILATORS 15838 -1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fans as factory -assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceiling -Mounting Ventilators: a. Cook, Loren Company. b. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co. C. Greenheck Fan Corp. d. ILG Industries, Inc./American Coolair Corp. e. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc. 2.2 CEILING -MOUNTING VENTILATORS A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in -line applications. B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. D. Grille: Stainless -steel, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. F. Accessories: POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 2 M ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11 /4/2003 1. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than 50 percent. 2. Isolation: Rubber -in -shear vibration isolators. 3. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." B. Enclosure Type: Guarded dripproof. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound -Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment. POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Equipment Startup Checks: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 7. Disable automatic temperature -control operators. B. Starting Procedures: 1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature -control operators. F. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Lubricate bearings. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet. POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilators. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. END OF SECTION 15838 POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 15855 -DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1u1►UV_4_t A. This Section includes ceiling- diffusers, registers, and grilles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume -control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following: I. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 2. Ceiling -mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. [i DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 -1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS A. Fixed Face Grille : 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Krueger. b. Price Industries. C. Titus. d. Tuttle & Bailey. e. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core Perforated core. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Mounting Frame: Filter. 7. Mounting: Lay in. 2.3 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS A. Perforated Diffuser: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Krueger. b. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. C. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. d. Price Industries. e. Titus. 2. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with steel face. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Duct Inlet: Round. 6. Face Style: Flush. 7. Pattern Controller: Fixed with curved blades at inlet. 8. Mounting: Mounting panel. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The contractor shall provide complete and operational systems at the completion of the contract. The contractor shall provide all labor and mateials required to comply with the intent of these documents, locat codes and ordinances, whether specifically indicated or not. B. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specification for the general construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective limit, "Pit, or "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the Specifications. C. Order of Precedence shall be observed in laying out pipe, ductwork, material and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panel boards, etc. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewer and storm drain lines. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. D. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material or equipment. 1.3 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "provide", "furnish and install" or other similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this division of the specification, complete for operation unless specifically noted otherwise. B. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition of the contract. C. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. D. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.4 FIRE RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES A. At penetrations of fire -rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire -rated, fire- resistant material, the full thickness of the construction element in accordance with applicable U.L. listed penetrations for rated assemblies. 1.5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS WIRING A. Starters for HVAC and Plumbing systems equipment shall be furnished under the Division 15 contract and installed under the Division 16 contract. B. Low voltage temperature control wiring shall be installed under the Division 15 Contract. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit information for individual sections as indicated in the following schedule. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 2 t vLwL r- n �.".rn �X z 0 n� C t17� �, > A rn r- p ov �.��- z z 3sn�"�t- ;C moo, rj En v—- C-AO ()n, v� n ?. construction photos construction video delegated Design manufacturers instructions Material safety data sheets Wiring diagrams Insurance certificates Installer certificates Manufacturer certificates Material certificates Product certificates Welding certificates Design Data Maintenance Data < < < < < Product Data Qualification Data Coordination drawings < < Shop drawings Compatibility test reports Evaluation reports Field test reports Product test reports preconstruction test reports Material test reports Research reports Product schedule Samples Samples for initial selection Samples for review Samples for color review Samples for kind review Samples for pattern review Samples for texture review Samples for verification ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.7 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of Work. B. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. Owner will handle and store products. C. For portions of Project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial Completion, deliver a proportional part of spare products to Owner; obtain receipt. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 ELECTRICAL INSTALLAITON MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide #10 conductors for all 120v circuits over 100' in length and 277 v circuits over 250'; in length B. Extend conduit from below concrete slab to above finished slabs using Rigid or IMC stub up. C. Provide set screw connectors for EMT conduit for conduit 2" and larger. Use compression conductors for conduit smaller than 2". D. Provide %" conduit with pullwire from 4sq box for individual communication outlets to above ceiling. Provide bushing on conduit 12" above ceiling.. E. Provide 1" conduit with pull wire from 4sq box for individual data outlets outlets to above ceiling. Provide bushing on conduit 12" above ceiling.. F. Provide 1" conduit with pull wire from 4sq box for combined data/communications outlets G. Provide GFI outlets in all "WP" weatherproof outlets. END OF SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by owner. 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors." D. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. E. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. EMT: ANSI C80.3, zinc -coated steel, with set -screw or compression fittings. B. FMC: Zinc -coated steel. C. IMC: ANSI C80.6, zinc -coated steel, with threaded fittings. D. LFMC: Zinc -coated steel with sunlight -resistant and mineral -oil -resistant plastic jacket. E. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used. 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper. B. Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper. C. Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated at 75 deg C minimum. D. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for service indicated. 2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Material: Cold -formed steel, with corrosion -resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot -dip galvanized steel. C. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 D. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for slotted channel framing. 1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports. E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C- clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click - type hangers. F. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. G. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat -treated steel. 2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI Al3.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick- C. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. D. Engraved -Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background. E. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless - steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2.5 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations: , I . Exposed: IMC. 2. Concealed: IMC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4. B. Use the following raceways for indoor installations: 1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering. ' D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location. F. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. G. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a maximum of 72-inch flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. 3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS A. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 4 I-] ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 B. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THIAN insulated conductors in raceway. 3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet. C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. C. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb design load. . 3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits. C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers. D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe hangers or clamps. F. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated. G. Spring -steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable -iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. t ` BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet -metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are Y f mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength. K. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: 1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw -type nails. 2. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete. 3. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel. a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 4. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. 5. Light Steel: Sheet -metal screws. 6. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof -test load. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. C. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. 3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 6 1 ) ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 11/4/2003 3.11 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 7 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground -fault circuit interrupters, 2. Single- and double -pole snap switches. 3. Device wall plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner -Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. WIl21NG DEVICES 16140 -1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wiring Devices: a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary. b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. d. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Straight -Blade -Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C- 596G, and UL 498. B. Straight -Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy -Duty grade. C. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non -feed -through type, Heavy -Duty grade, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet box without an adapter. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Single- and Double -Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. B. Snap Switches: Heavy -Duty grade, quiet type. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin -finished stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 2.5 FINISHES A. Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS PART 3 - EXECUTION 11/4/2003 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines. B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. 2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.4 SCHEDULE OF DEVICES A. Switches DEVICE VOLTAGE MODEL NO MANUFACTURER Single Pole 120/277 1221 Hubbell (Provide red face and device plate on all switches served from emergency electrical service) B. Receptacles DEVICE RATING VOLTAGE MODEL NO MANUFACTURER Duplex Receptacle 15A 125 5252 Hubbell Duplex Receptacle 20A 125 5362 Hubbell Ground Fault Receptacle 125 GF-5362 Hubbell Range Outlet 50A 250 9367 Hubbell (Provide red face and device plate on all outlets served from emergency electrical service) END OF SECTION 16140 W IZING DEVICES 16140 - 4 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 11/4/2003 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. HD: Heavy duty. B. RMS: Root mean square. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 16410 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NL&NUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FUSIBLE AND NON -FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler -Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D/Group Schneider. B. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Nonfusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches. B. Mount individual wall -mounting switches with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor -mounting switches to concrete base. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows: 1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 3. Verify rating of installed fuses. 4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS ON 16410 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Load centers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and ..a manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. C. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler -Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D. PANELBOARDS 16442 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." B. Enclosures: Surface -mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer coat. 5. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door. C. Phase and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material. 1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A. UL label indicating series -connected rating with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series -connected short-circuit rating. B. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.4 LOAD CENTERS A. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in, full -module circuit breaker. B. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses. " PANELBOARDS 16442 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with series -connected rating to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. B. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory -assembled to operate as a single unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." C. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. E. Install overcurrent protective devices Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. PANELBOARDS 16442 - 4 1 '' [-'I ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS 16442 - 5 No Text ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 16491 - FUSES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V and less for use in switches . 2. Spare -fuse cabinets. 1.3 _ SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. 2. Let -through current curves for fuses with current -limiting characteristics. 3. Time -current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data. 4. Fuse size for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from a single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NEMA FU 1. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. FUSES 16491 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts. 2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces. 3. Exit signs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall -box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. Ratio of light output of a given lamp(s) operated by the subject ballast to the light output of the same lamp(s) when operated on an ANSI reference circuit. B. CRI: Color rendering index. C. CU: Coefficient of utilization. D. LER: Luminaire efficiency rating, which is calculated according to NEMA LE 5. This value can be estimated from photometric data using the following formula: 1. LER is equal to the product of total rated lamp lumens times BF times luminaire efficiency, divided by input watts. E. RCR: Room cavity ratio. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 1 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 3. Fluorescent and high -intensity -discharge ballasts. 4. Lamps. 11/4/2003 B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 2 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 2.2 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least minimum unless different thickness is scheduled. b. UV stabilized. 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS A. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output except for emergency lamps powered by in -fixture battery -packs. 2. Externally fused with slow -blow type rated between 2.65 and 3.0 times the line current. B. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with NEMA C82.11. 2. Ballast Type: Instant start, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Programmed Start: Bailasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently started lamps. 4. Sound Rating: A. t' INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 3 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2.4 2.5 11/4/2003 5. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 20 percent according to NEMA C82.11. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A. 7. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. 9. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. C. Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments: 1. Temperatures 0 deg F and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg Fminus 17 deg C starting temperature. 2. Temperatures Minus 20 deg FMinus 29 deg C and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with high -output lamps. HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 1. Type: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg Fminus 30 deg C for single -lamp ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F40 deg C. 4. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life. B. Low Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy -encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. EXIT SIGNS A. General: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light -emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum of rated lamp life. FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate two fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Test Switch and Light -Emitting -Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type with minimum seven-year nominal life. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 4 n ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type. 2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Low -Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1. B. T8 rapid -start low -mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMPS A. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 65 (minimum), and color temperature 4000. 2.9 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel- and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Wires: ASTM A 64l/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated, 12 gage. 2.10 FINISHES A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide services of a qualified, independent testing and inspecting agency to factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and photometric data. B. Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and photometric data. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 5 ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 11/4/2003 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid -Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4- inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. D. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion. END OF SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 6